Home

SIMATIC HMI HMI device Mobile Panel 277

1. PLC q The recipe data record is read from the PLC and written to the PLC again following changes Display and edit recipe tags in the recipe screen Tags are synchronized Recipe data records are saved in the recipe memory of the HMI device O00 oO Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 254 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Maintenance and care 1 1 11 1 Maintenance and care Scope of maintenance The HMI device is designed for maintenance free operation The touch screen and keyboard membrane should nevertheless be cleaned regularly Preparation caution Inadvertent operation Always switch off the HMI device before cleaning it This will ensure that you do not trigger functions unintentionally when you touch the keys Requirements Use a cleaning cloth dampened with a cleaning agent to clean the equipment Only use water with a little liquid soap or a screen cleaning foam CAUTION Do not clean the HMI device with compressed air or steam jet blowers Never use aggressive solvents or scouring powder Procedure Proceed as follows 1 Switch off the HMI device 2 Spray the cleaning solution onto a cleaning cloth Do not spray directly onto the HMI device 3 Clean the HMI device When cleaning the display wipe from the screen edge inwards Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 255 Maintenance and care
2. Note In the following cases you may not enable PROFINET IO in the Control Panel e Use of PLCs from other manufacturers e Use of SIMATIC 500 505 via NITP e Use of SIMATIC S5 via AS511 Compatible PLCs The following table shows the supported PLCs protocols or profiles PLC Protocol SIMATIC S7 e PPI e MPI e PROFIBUS DP e TCP IP Ethernet SIMATIC S5 e PROFIBUS DP e AS 511 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 30 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO Overview 7 7 Communications PLC Protocol SIMATIC 500 505 e NITP e PROFIBUS DP SIMATIC HMI HTTP protocol e HTTP HTTPS Ethernet Allen Bradley PLC series e DF1 2 5 SLC500 SLC501 SLC502 SLC503 SLC504 SLC505 MicroLogix and PLC5 11 PLC5 20 PLC5 30 PLC5 40 PLC5 60 PLC5 80 Allen Bradley PLC series ControlLogix 5500 CompactLogix 5300 DH via KF2 module 3 5 DH485 via KF3 module 5 8 DH485 4 Allen Bradley E IP C Logix Ethernet IP GE Fanuc Automation PLC series 90 30 90 70 VersaMax Micro LG Industrial Systems Lucky Goldstar IMO PLC series GLOFA GM GM4 GM6 and GM7 series G4 G6 and G7 SNP 58 Dedicated communication 5 8 Mitsubishi Electric PLC series MELSEC FX and MELSEC FX0 FX 5 6 Mitsubishi Electric PLC series MELSEC FXO FX1n FX2n AnA AnN AnS AnU QnA and QnAS Protocol 4 5 8 OMRON PLC series SYSMAC C SYSMAC CV SY
3. File cabinet Recipe collection Recipes for a fruit juice plant Drawer Recipe Orange flavored drinks Drawer Recipe Grape flavored drinks Drawer Recipe Apple flavored drinks Drawer Recipe Cherry flavored drinks Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 230 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Operating recipes Recipe data records 10 2 Structure of a recipe The drawers of the file cabinet are filled with suspension folders The suspension folders in the drawers represent records required for manufacturing various product variants Example Product variants of the flavor apple might be a soft drink a juice or nectar for example Drawer Suspension folder Suspension folder Suspension folder O00 Elements Recipe Recipe data record Recipe data record Recipe data record Product variants of apple flavored drinks Apple drink Apple nectar Apple juice In the figure showing the file cabinet each suspension folder contains the same number of sheets Each sheet in the suspension folder corresponds to an element of the recipe data record All the records of a recipe contain the same elements The records differ however in the value of the individual elements Example All drinks contain the same components water concentrate sugar and flavoring The records for soft drink fruit juice or nectar differ however in the quantity of sugar used in production Mobile Panel 277 WinC
4. on the label on the rear panel C The HMI device and the connection box satisfy the requirements and protection objectives of the following EC Directory The HMI device and the connection box comply with the harmonized European standards EN promulgated in the Official Journals of the European Community for programmable controllers e 2004 108 EC Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Directive e Directive 2006 95 EC Electrical Equipment Designed for Use within Certain Voltage Limits LowVoltage Directive EC Declaration of Conformity The EC Declarations of Conformity are available to the relevant authorities at the following address Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Industry Sector IA AS RD ST PLC P O Box 1963 D 92209 Amberg Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Safety instructions and general notes 2 2 Standards Cetificates and Approvals UL approval Os Underwriters Laboratories Inc conforming to e UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment e CSA C22 2 No 142 Process Control Equipment Marking for Australia G N117 The HMI device and the connection box satisfy the requirements of Standard AS NZS 2064 Class A SIBE Switzerland Certification Service The HMI device and the connection box satisfy Safety Category 3 in accordance with EN 954 1 The enabling device safety function for special operation control and the STOP button satisfy t
5. 5 7 Connection box 5 7 3 Displays on the connection box PN Introduction There are six LEDs on the front side of the connection box PN which indicate the state of communication LNK ACT LNK ACT LNK ACT OOddO GU Porti Port2 PANEL PROFINET SSS SS LED display LED There is an LNK and ACT LED available for the following connections e PROFINET connection Port1 e PROFINET connection Port2 e Mobile Panel 277 Meaning of the LED displays e LED LNK The LED is permanently lit if the associated port of the connection box PN is connected to a cable and the connection is faultless e LED ACT The LED flashes when data is transferred via the associated port of the connection box PN Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 114 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Configuring the operating system 6 1 Loader Loader The figure below shows the loader Transfer Start Control Panel Taskbar Hele The loader buttons have the following functions e The Transfer button sets the HMI device to Transfer mode The transfer mode can only be activated when at least one data channel has been enabled for the transfer e Press the Start button to start the project that exists on the HMI device If you do not perform an operation the project on the HMI device will automatically start after a delay e Press the Control Panel button to open the Control Panel of the HMI d
6. Set Transfer mode on the HMI device If automatic transfer mode is enabled on the HMI device the HMI device automatically sets Transfer mode when a backup is initiated Start the backup operation in WinCC flexible with OK on the configuring PC Follow the instructions in WinCC flexible A status view opens to indicate the progress of the operation The system outputs a message when the backup is completed The relevant data is now backed up on the configuring PC Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 175 Commissioning a project 7 6 Backup and restore Procedure for restore Result See also 176 Proceed as follows 1 On the configuring PC select the Communication settings command in the menu Project gt Transfer in WinCC flexible The Communication Settings dialog opens 2 Select the type of HMI device 3 Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the configuring PC Set the connection parameters 4 Close the dialog with OK 5 Select the Restore command in the menu Project gt Transfer in WinCC flexible The Restore Settings dialog opens 6 Select the psb backup file to be restored from the Open field You can see the HMI device for which the backup file was created and the type of backup data the file contains 7 Set Transfer mode on the HMI device If automatic transfer mode is enabled on the HMI
7. Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 208 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Operating a project 8 11 Operating the Sm rtClient view Result All values are read cyclically by the PLC and entered in the Status value column until the Go button is touched again Requirements for forcing The following requirements must be fulfilled in order to force values e The Control value column must be available e The Write button must be available Procedure for forcing a value Proceed as follows 1 Enter the address of a value for each line Enter the desired value in the Control value column Touch the respective columns to display the screen keyboard 2 Once you have entered all of the desired values touch the E button Result The values from the Control value column are transferred once to the PLC 8 11 Operating the Sm rtClient view 8 11 1 Overview Application The Sm rtClient view enables you to monitor and remotely operate the current project of a remote HMI device With the correct configuration several equal priority HMI devices can access a remote HMI device Note If another HMI device accesses your HMI device via the Sm rtClient view this leads to an additional load on your HMI device Layout In the Sm rtClient view the remote HMI is displayed with the complete layout Depending on the configuration you can monitor and also operate this screen You can also operate the function k
8. Select the License Keys command in the menu Project gt Transfer The Automation License Manager opens When transferring using the Automation License Manager Start the Automation License Manager via the Windows Start menu Inthe Automation License Manager select the command Connect HMI device in the menu Edit gt Connect target system The Connect Target System dialog opens 4 Under Device Type select the appropriate HMI device type 5 Select the type of connection in the Connection field and set the connection parameters 6 Select OK The connection to the HMI device is established The connected HMI device is displayed in the left window of the Automation License Manager Inthe left window select the source drive The right window displays the available license keys Drag one or more license keys from the right window and drop them on the HMI device in the left window The license keys are then transferred to the HMI device The license key has now been transferred from the license diskette to the HMI device Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO Commissioning a project 7 9 Transferring and transferring license keys Procedure for transferring a license key back Proceed as follows 1 2 Switch to Transfer mode on the HMI device When transferring back using WinCC flexible Select the License Keys command in the men
9. Change the data record as required Save your changes by means of the al button If you want to save the recipe data record under a different name touch the al key The recipe data record is saved The edited recipe data record has now been saved in the selected recipe Procedure 1 2 3 4 5 Result See also Recipes in the project Page 232 10 6 4 Deleting a recipe data record Introduction You can delete all the data records of a recipe which are not required Requirements A screen with a recipe view is displayed Proceed as follows If the recipe view contains several recipes Select the recipe which contains the desired recipe data record Select the recipe data record you want to delete Touch x The recipe data record is deleted Procedure 1 2 3 Result See also Recipes in the project Page 232 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 241 Operating recipes 10 6 Operating the recipe view 10 6 5 Synchronizing tags Introduction Requirement Procedure Result See also 242 The values of the recipe elements can be saved to recipe tags depending on the configuration Differences may occur between the display values in the recipe view and the actual values of tags in an ongoing project Synchronize the tags to equalize such differences Synchronization always includes all the variables which belong to a recipe
10. Connection graphic The following figure shows how to connect the equipotential bonding conductor to the connection box PN Plus i mooooo MOOOO0 OOOO00 mMOOOOG 00 oOo oo 00 oOo Ae ERS BS AC CC SAC Me ca E Ea ik PE connection on the connection box terminal strip 1 pin 1 Equipotential bonding conductor cross section 2 5 mm Switching cabinet Equipotential bonding conductor cross section min 16 mm2 Ground connection Cable clip Equipotential busbar P 2OHOOHOHOHO Parallel routing of the equipotential bonding conductor and data cable Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 60 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Installation and connection 4 4 Connecting the connection box 4 4 6 Connecting the PLC Introduction Always use the approved cables to connect a SIMATIC S7 PLC Note also the maximum permissible cable lengths for the process interface Standard cables are available for the onnection For additional information refer to the Internet at ttp mall automation siemens com Configuration diagram Connecting a PLC to a connection box DP The figure below shows how to connect the PLC to the connection box DP and to a Mobile Panel 277 8 SIMATIC S7 SIMATIC S5 SIMATIC S5 SIMATIC 500 505 SIMATIC 500 505 E PLC from other manufacturers PLC from other RS 422 RS 485 manufacturers 1 When operated on port
11. Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation Requirements The logon dialog is open Procedure Proceed as follows 1 Enter the user name and password Touch the corresponding input field The alphanumerical screen keyboard is displayed 2 Select OK to confirm logon Note The user name is not case sensitive The password is case sensitive Result After successful logon to the security system you can execute password protected functions on the HMI device for which you have authorizations If you enter a wrong password an error message is displayed when an alarm window has been configured Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 215 Operating a project 8 12 Project security 8 12 4 User logoff Requirements You have logged into the security system of the HMI device Procedure You have the following options for logging off e You press an operating element that was configured for logoff e You will be logged off automatically if you are not operating the project and if the logoff time has been exceeded You will also be automatically logged off if you enter an incorrect password Result You are no longer logged into the project In order to activate an operating element with password protection you must first log on again 8 12 5 Creating users Requirements You have opened a screen containing the user view You have user
12. Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO 77 Installation and connection 4 6 Switching on and testing the HMI device Result The loader appears again Note When restarting the system a project may already be loaded on the HMI device The system then skips Transfer mode and starts the project Use the relevant operator control to close the project Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation Function test Perform a function test following commissioning The HMI device is fully functional when one of the following states is indicated e The Transfer dialog is displayed e The loader appears e A project is started Switching off the HMI device The following procedure applies if a rechargeable battery is not installed Terminate the project at the HMI device before switching it off You have the following options for switching off the HMI device e Switch off the power supply e Pull out the connecting cable from the connection box Note Recovery time Wait for approximately one second after you have removed the connecting cable from the connection box before you plug the connecting cable back into the connection box Wait approximately one second after switching off the power supply before you switch it back on again After power failures lasting less than one second the connecting cable has to be disconnected Mobile
13. Rotation of the handwheel produces positive or negative pulses depending on the rotation direction The number of positive pulses are stored in bits 10 to I7 The number of negative pulses are stored in bits DO to D7 The values are entered in binary format where bit 0 is the lowest and bit 7 is the highest valued bit A complete handwheel revolution yields 50 pulses Every pulse of the handwheel is added to byte n 4 or n 5 depending on the direction of rotation There are no negative values When the possible value range is exceeded there is an overflow If a value of 255 is increased by one pulse a value of 0 results Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO 93 Operator controls and displays 5 2 Operator controls of Mobile Panel 277 8 Example of bit coding for handwheel 94 The following table includes an example for rotation direction determination The pulses are stored in bytes n 4 and n 5 and are measured during the points in time t4 to ta The numbers in the following table represent a byte in the PLC Evaluation time Handwheel Evaluation Pulses forwards Pulses backwards t 255 4 1 245 4 11 t2 10 245 4 11 Pulses forwards 11 Pulses backwards 0 Resulting value 11 t3 10 4 Pulses forwards 0 Pulses backwards 15 Resulting value 15 t4 15 5 Pulses forwards 5 Pulses backwards 1 Resulting value 4
14. The difference in pulses at times tn and tn 1 allows you to determine the resulting value and thus the direction of rotation Establish the following values e Number of pulses forwards Attime tn Attime tn e Number of pulses backwards Attime tn Attime tn From this you determine the resulting value This is calculated as Pulses forwards tn 1 Pulses forwards tn Pulses backwards tn 1 Pulses backwards tn Resulting value Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Operator controls and displays Reaction time 5 2 Operator controls of Mobile Panel 277 8 The bytes n 4 and n 5 must be retrieved on the PLC side within a second and cyclically This ensures that no more than 256 pulses can be added between two scans of the handwheel For 256 pulses approximately 4 5 revolutions of the handwheel are required The rotary pulse encoder supplies a maximum of 200 pulses per second NOTICE Sample cycle time The input pulses should take effect immediately on the PLC and cause a response in the system Set a scan cycle lt 100 ms in the PLC to achieve this 5 2 7 3 Controlling the LEDs of the function keys by means of system functions Application Bit assignment LEDs are integrated in the HMI device s function keys F1 to F18 The integrated LEDs can be controlled from the PLC The LEDs can assume the following states e Of
15. Connecting cables 53 Connection box 41 Connection sequence Data channel Data loss Degree of protection 56 Direct key Disconnecting Mobile Panel 112 Electrostatic charging 285 Enabling button 33 39 Equipotential bonding conductor 59 ESD General High frequency radiation Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO Screen keyboard 119 194 IP65 degree of protection pa Keyboard 80 License key Malfunctions 69 Memory distribution 140 Multi key operation Observe grounding measures 286 Operating the Mobile Panel 110 Path Power failure Preventing inadvertent operation PROFINET 10 63 Project file Rechargeable battery 25 69 Recipe data record in background Releasing the STOP button Remote control for channel 1 146 Remove connecting cable Reset to factory settings RJ45 socket Sample cycle time 95 STOP bution 33 40 41 51 84 100 Storage Switching infotext 200 Touch screen 80 81 Transfer mode 147 Transfer mode channel 2 147 Transport Unintentional action Unintentional transfer mode USB Host to Host cable 75 Voltage suppl 37 Safety isolation 6 Safety regulations 33 Scaling Functional scope 27 screen Functional scope 28 Alphanumerical 19 Change layout 121 Character repeat Configuring For Control Panel Keyboard level Language change Numerical 19 Rep
16. Connection point recognition You can implement connection point recognition as follows e Reading out of the box ID set in the connection box by the HMI device e Wiring the connection box to a digital input of the PLC Note Connection point recognition via box ID The solution with box ID works with various plant configurations Note The Project recognition area pointer ensures that the HMI device is connected to the PLC which supports the project The Project recognition area pointer can only be associated with one PLC per project You will find further information in the WinCC flexible communication manual Note A box ID cannot be set up on a Mobile Panel 170 connection box In this case connection point recognition is only possible via the digital input of the PLC Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 317 Appendix A 3 Things to remember during configuration A 3 1 2 Connection Point Recognition via Box ID Box ID Requirements You can read out the box ID of the connection box to which the mobile panel in connected in the project Note If you connect a Mobile Panel 277 to a Mobile Panel 170 connection box the box ID will always deliver the value 255 e You have set the box ID at all connection boxes e Each connection box is assigned a unique box ID Example for the evaluation of the current box ID In order to ensure that
17. Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Operating recipes Data flow 10 3 Recipes in the project The following figure shows the data flow in a project with recipes HMI device Recipe view lt E ecipe 4 screen Display and edit recipe tags in the recipe screen Write records from the recipe view to the PLC or read records from the PLC and display them in the recipe view Recipe tags are sent to the PLC online or offline Export or import recipe data record to memory card PLC Editing saving or deleting a recipe data record Display recipe data record Synchronize or do not synchronize recipe tags Ge 000000 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 233 Operating recipes 10 4 Displaying a recipe 10 4 Displaying a recipe Displaying recipes You can display and edit recipes on the HMI device with a recipe view or recipe screen Recipe view A recipe view is a screen object used to manage recipe data records The recipe view shows recipe data records in tabular form Depending on the configuration the recipe view is displayed as follows e As enhanced recipe view e As simple recipe view The configuration engineer also defines which operating elements are displayed in the recipe view Enhanced recipe view The following figure shows an example of the enhanced rec
18. Procedure 6 5 Changing HMI device settings You need the device specific information when contacting Technical Support You have opened the Device tab in the OP Properties dialog box by pressing the OP ip icon OP Properties Persistent Storage Display Device Mobile Panel 277 a 8 Image Version 01 00 00 00_01 12 Bootloader Version 0 85 O Bootloader Rel Date 22 11 2005 E y Flashsize 64 MB e MAC Address 00 08 29 06 49 d7 Il Reboot N O HMI device name Version of the HMI device image Version of the boot loader Boot loader release date Size of the internal flash memory in which the HMI device image and project are stored MAC address of the HMI device Button for restarting the HMI device Proceed as follows 1 The device specific information is displayed in the Device tab 2 Close the dialog when the information is no longer required Note The size of the internal flash memory does not correspond to the available working memory for a project Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0AB0O 139 Configuring the operating system 6 5 Changing HMI device settings 6 5 9 Displaying System Properties Introduction The system specific information provides you with information about the processor operating system and memory of the HMI device Requirements You have opened the System
19. The maximum buffer time is 10 minutes The rechargeable battery is able to bridge the buffer time 5 times without recharging During the buffer time the backlight of the display is switched off When the mobile panel is connected to a connection box the rechargeable battery is charged automatically NOTICE Recharging and discharging the rechargeable battery In the following cases there is a risk of fire and in extreme cases explosion e Incorrect charging and discharging of the rechargeable battery e Reverse polarity e Short circuit The rechargeable battery may only be recharged in the mobile panel Note The HMI device may supply the same system alarms as it would do in the event of a communication interrupt when reconnecting the HMI device to another connection box Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 24 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Overview 1 4 Accessories Safety instructions The rechargeable battery is a Li ion rechargeable battery The following safety notes apply to these rechargeable batteries e Do not crush e Do not expose to heat and do not burn e Do not short circuit e Do not take apart e Do not immerse in liquid the battery might crack or burst Ordering information The rechargeable buffer battery is not included with the HMI device Note You may only use the battery option package as of product version 02 The product version is availabl
20. 0 to disable the function The minimum time is 5 and the maximum is 71582 minutes a Time interval in minutes until backlighting is reduced Period of time in minutes before the screen saver is activated Screen saver setting Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 135 Configuring the operating system 6 5 Changing HMI device settings Procedure Result 6 5 6 Introduction 136 Proceed as follows 1 Enter the interval in minutes after which the backlighting is to be reduced Entering 0 will deactivate the backlighting reduction 2 Enter the number of minutes before the screen saver is to be activated The minimum time is 5 minutes and the maximum time is 71582 minutes Entering 0 disables the screen saver 3 Select either the standard screen saver or an empty screen In order to select the standard screen saver activate the Standard option In order to select an empty screen as screen saver activate the Blank Screen option 4 Confirm your entries The dialog closes The screen saver and the reduced backlighting for the HMI device is set Changing the Printer Properties HMI devices that are connected via PROFINET can print via a network printer You can print hardcopies and reports on a network printer Line printing of alarms is not possible on a network printer The list_o i i etti M i an be found on the Int
21. 1 distance between clicks your settings using the grid above Double click this icon to test your double click settings If this icon doesn t change adjust a 2 Pattern Icon Procedure Proceed as follows 1 Double click the pattern twice After one double click the pattern is shown in inverse colors Bo 2 Double click the symbol twice If the double click is valid the icon is displayed as follows rs 3 If the icon remains unchanged double click on the pattern again 4 Confirm your entries The dialog closes Result The double click adjustment is completed Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 125 Configuring the operating system 6 3 Changing settings for operation 6 3 4 Calibrating the Touch Screen Introduction Requirements Procedure 126 Depending on the mounting position and viewing angle it is possible that parallax may occur when operating the touch screen In order to prevent any operating errors as a result calibrate the touch screen again in the startup phase or during runtime You have opened the Touch tab in the OP Properties dialog box by pressing the OP ie icon OP Properties Persistent Storage Display Device Touch If your Windows CE device is not responding W 4 properly to your taps you may need to recalibrate your screen To start tap Recalibrate Recalibrate 0
22. 1 Tslot 2 Tqui 3 Tset 4 MinTsdr 5 MaxTsdr 6 Trdy 7 Tid1 8 Tid2 9 Gap Factor 10 Retry Limit Check the connection and if the PLC is switched on Check the parameter definitions in the Control Panel using Set PG PC interface Restart the system Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0AB0 297 Appendix A 2 System alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 140008 No tag updating or writing is executed because Check the connection and if the PLC is switched on baud rate is incorrect The following parameters Check the parameter definitions in the Control Panel could not be written to the registry using Set PG PC interface 0 General error Restart the system 1 Wrong version 2 Profile cannot be written to the registry 3 The subnet type cannot be written to the registry 4 The Target Rotation Time cannot be written to the registry 5 Faulty Highest Address HSA 140009 Tags are not updated or written because the Reinstall the module in the Control Panel using Set module for S7 communication was not found PG PC interface 140010 No S7 communication partner found because the Switch the PLC on PLC is shut down DP T DP T If only one master is connected to the network disable The option PG PC is the only master is not setin PG PC is the only master in Set PG PC interface the Control Pa
23. 11 2 Spare Parts and Repairs 11 2 Spare Parts and Repairs Repairs In case of repair the HMI device must be shipped to the Return Center in Furth Repairs may only be carried out at the Return Center in Furth Depending on the work necessary to repair the device the Center may decide to give you a credit note In this case it is your responsibility to order a new device The address is Siemens AG Industry Sector Return Center Siemensstr 2 90766 Furth Germany Service pack A service pack can be ordered for servicing purposes The service pack includes e Plugs for the cable duct only for Mobile Panel 177 e 2 x screw joints for connection box e 1 set of screws for connection box cover e 2x plug in terminal strips 12 pin e 1 plug in terminal strip three set block e Mobile Panel 277 enclosure The service pack can be ordered from your Siemens representative Replacement key set If necessary you can order a replacement key set from your Siemens representative Service amp Support on the Internet Service amp Support provides additional comprehensive information on SIMATIC products through online services at http support automation siemens com e On site service e Repairs e Replacement parts and lots more Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 256 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Technical specifications 1 2 12 1 Dimension drawings 12 1 1 Mobile Panel 277 8 Front view
24. All data on the HMI device will be deleted during a restore operation Existing licenses are retained Requirements A memory card with sufficient free capacity is inserted in the HMI device The size of the internal flash memory is displayed with information about the HMI device A warning is displayed if the available space is insufficient and backup is aborted You have opened the Backup Restore dialog box by pressing the Backup Restore icon Backup Restore OK Backup to memory card BACKUP o Restore from memory card RESTORE _ Button for backup to memory card Button for restore from memory card Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 160 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Configuring the operating system 6 9 Backup and Restore with the Memory Card Procedure for backup Proceed as follows 1 Press the BACKUP button to start the backup 2 The HMI device checks the memory card If no memory card is inserted in the card slot of the HMI device or if the memory card is damaged The following warning is displayed No storage card detected Acknowledge the warning and the next message Backup aborted The Control Panel is displayed again A message is displayed if the memory card already contains data Follow the instructions of the HMI device 3 The following messages and dialogs are displayed in sequence during backup Checking Regis
25. Select the Status_Operator_Control tag as Value Tags g Device Settings Status_Control_Element lt Internal tag gt lt No address gt a Auxiliary _Tag PLC_1 Word DB 1 DBW 0 lt m General Functio P Properties EE n list a gt piel 1 SetValue a Y aR ijid Tag Out Control_Element_PLC m Low limit Value Status_Control_Element 2 lt No function gt When communication between the HMI device and the PLC has been made the current PLC old value will be automatically written to the External_Box ID tag The Auxiliary Tag is required so that the current value of the box ID can be transferred to the PLC A program in the PLC evaluates the live bit After the control program has recognized the creation of communication the control program changes the current value once in the Auxiliary Tag tag This causes a change in value The value change in the Auxiliary_Tag triggers performance of the SetValue system function The system function assigns the value of the Status_Control_Element tag again to the Control_Element_PLC tag 12 To configure the system function open the Properties view of the Auxiliary Tag 13 Click Change value in the properties window of the Auxiliary_Tag tag in the Events group The Function list dialog box opens 14 Click the first line of the function list The list opens showing the system functions available in the project 15 Select the SetValu
26. cece teeter teeter erent eee eet ie ee teed erent ee tae ee eee eee naeee ee eeeee ne eeaeeeeeeea 3 4 Specifications for Insulation Tests Protection Class and Degree of Protection Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO 9 Table of contents 10 3 5 Installation ANd CONNECTION cccccccceeeeceeeeeeeeusesueeceeseueseusceueeeuueueceeuseueseeaseuseeeaseueeeeuseees suseuasueenseaeeuess 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 4 1 4 4 2 4 4 3 4 4 4 4 4 5 4 46 4 4 7 4 48 4 4 9 4 5 4 5 1 4 5 2 4 5 3 4 5 4 4 5 5 4 6 Operator controls and displays c cccsceceeesseeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeesaaeesesaceeeesaeeeeeseaeeeeesaaeeeeesaaeeneeesesaeesensaeess 5 3 1 1 5 3 1 2 5 3 2 5 3 3 5 3 3 1 5 3 3 2 Rated VOlaQeS sesiis as EAn E ENAR EA SE ROEN E TEE Checking the Package Contents ccc cccceusssccccussccecceusescccensesecensesecceusuecdensuauecenradecensneeecensanecedecs Mounting the Connection Box and Wall Holder 0 00 0 eccceececeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeeeeeieeeeeteeeeeesieeeeetnaeeeeeaa Electrical Installation ii ccnsscceviesvieveesceescecvieeendiveveatcveeuladi eevcadieeevadedeuvadenveeyleleveviavvarivievaaiees Connecting the CONNECTION DOX ccc cece eneceeeeetecneeeesceeeecaecseeseenecsseceeseseeeesesasesseseeaeens 53 OVGRVIGW oi Tiar eile sees ice a ee erase ee ee E 53 Opening and closing the connection DOX s sssssssssrranssnnenesnnorannansnnnaatanansennanna
27. conductor then the impedance of the additionally laid equipotential bonding may amount to amaximum of 10 of the screened impedance e The cross section of a selected equipotential bonding conductor must be capable of handling the maximum equalizing current Between switching cabinets equipotential bonding conductors as detailed in the Guidelines for interference free installation of PLCs description and the PROFIBUS networks manual have proven themselves reliable in practice e Use equipotential bonding conductors made of copper or galvanized steel Establish a large surface contact between the equipotential bonding conductors and the grounding protective conductor and protect these from corrosion e Clamp the shielding of the data cable on the HMI device flush and near the equipotential busbar using suitable cable clamps e Route the equipotential bonding conductor and data cables in parallel with minimum clearance between them NOTICE Equipotential bonding conductor Cable shielding is not suitable for equipotential bonding Always use the prescribed equipotential bonding conductors When installing MPI and PROFIBUS DP networks always use cables with an adequate cross section Otherwise there is a risk that interface components will be damaged or destroyed Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO 59 Installation and connection 4 4 Connecting the connection box
28. methods depending on the configuration e Touch a button configured for this action e Exit the screen containing the Sm rtClient view e If configured a menu is displayed after you have touched an empty space over a longer period Select the Close menu item Please refer to your system documentation to check whether additional information on this subject is available there Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 211 Operating a project 8 12 Project security 8 12 Project security 8 12 1 Overview Design of the security system The configuration engineer can protect the operation of a project by implementing a security system The security system is based on authorizations user groups and users If operating elements protected by a password are operated the HMI device first requests that you log on A logon screen is displayed in which you enter your user name and password After logging on you can operate the operating elements for which you have the necessary authorizations The logon dialog can be set up by the configuration engineer via an individual operating element In the same way the configuration engineer can set up an operating element to log off After logging off objects assigned password protection can no longer be operated to do so log on again Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation User groups and authorization
29. n C 3 TxD 3 TxD 4 n C n C n C 4 RxD 2 RxD 3 n C n C n C 5 M 5 M 15 M 5 M 5 n C 6 n C n C TxD 3 Bus B 3 n c 7 n C n C TxD 8 Bus A 8 n C 8 n C n C RxD 4 n C n C 9 n C n C RxD 9 n C n C 10 PE PE PE PE PE 11 n C n C n C n C M24 12 n C n C n C n C P24 The values in parentheses in the table refer to the pin numbers in the WinCC flexible Online Help for the standard cables described for the individual couplings Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 273 Technical specifications 12 5 Port Assignment on the Connection Box PN Fast Connector 4 pin The connection box contains two Fast Connectors for connecting the PROFIBUS DP data cables ARN Pin assignment of the Fast Connector Pin Assignment 1 LTG A IN 2 LTG B IN 3 LTG A OUT 4 LTG B OUT See also Port assignment on the connection box DP and connection box PN Page 276 12 5 Port Assignment on the Connection Box PN Location of the ports mooooo MOOOO0 OOOO0O0 mMOOOOG OO OO Oo 00 OO Ae Fast connector Terminal strip 1 CeO Terminal strip 2 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 274 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Technical specifications 12 5 Port Assignment on the Connection Box PN Fast Connector 4 pin The connection box contains two Fast Connectors for con
30. reselect the respective recipe data record Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 235 Operating recipes 10 4 Displaying a recipe Recipe screen A recipe screen allows the correlation between the plant and the recipe data to be displayed in graphic form The configuration engineer combines I O fields and screen objects to form a custom input screen The configuration engineer can distribute the I O fields of a recipe over several recipe screens thus allowing recipe elements to be arranged by subject The recipe screen can be operated using buttons configured accordingly The following figure shows an example of the recipe screen Recipe name No Orange 7 1 No Data record name Nectar 7 2 Data from the PLC Data to PLC Element name and associated values The element name designates a specific element in the recipe data record Buttons for editing a recipe data record Modified recipe view O00 oO Buttons for transferring recipe data The values displayed or entered in the recipe screen are saved in recipe tags The recipe values are exchanged with the PLC immediately or later via these tags A configured recipe view can itself be a component of a recipe screen You must synchronize the tags in order to synchronize data between the tags of the recipe screen and the recipe data records displayed in the recipe view Synchronization of tags is only
31. v Metallic push pull circular connector Strain relief and antikink device for the connection cable RJ45 connector Plug connector 12 pin Note When inserted the circular connector guarantees protection class IP65 1 4 2 Connection Box Design The following figure shows the connection box DP Screwed joint for process data line Threaded assembly for power supply cable Threaded assembly for cable with supplementary Stop and enabling button signals and for PLC accompanying signals Connecting socket for the connecting cable 00O 00O Dummy cap Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 22 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Overview Variants 1 4 Accessories The following figure shows the connection box PN SS ia o O Screwed joint for process data line LEDs Threaded assembly for power supply cable Threaded assembly for cable with supplementary Stop and enabling button signals and for PLC accompanying signals Connecting socket for the connecting cable covered with dummy cap NOTICE IP65 degree of protection Degree of protection IP65 is guaranteed for the connection box when the Mobile Panel 277 is connected or when a dummy cap is inserted The connection boxes are available in the following variants e Connection box Basic e Connection box Plus The difference between the two variants lies in
32. 1 or Channel 2 group A WaRNING Unintentional transfer mode Ensure that the configuring PC does not inadvertently switch the HMI device to transfer mode during the open project This could cause unintentional actions to be triggered in the plant Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0AB0 Configuring the operating system 6 7 Communication settings 3 Select the required protocol for Channel 2 in the selection box 4 Enter further parameters if required Applies to MPI PROFIBUS DP Press the Advanced button to change to the S7 Transfer Settings dialog box You can change the settings for MPI PROFIBUS DP there Confirm your entries The S7 Transfer Settings dialog box closes Applies to ETHERNET Press the Advanced button to change to the Network amp Dial Up Connections Open the LAN9001 entry You can change the TCP IP settings there Confirm your entries Close Network amp Dial Up Connections Applies to USB No further settings are required for USB 5 Confirm your entries The dialog closes Result The data channel is configured General information Note Changes during Transfer mode If the HMI device is in Transfer mode while changes are made to the transfer settings the settings only go into effect after the transfer function is restarted This may occur if the Control Panel is opened to change the
33. 1 kHz 3 electromagnetic fields in with 10 V m in the range of 80 MHz to 1 GHz accordance with with 3 V m in the range 1 4 GHz to 2 GHz IEC 61000 4 3 with 1 V m the range 2 GHz to 2 7 GHz e 10 V m with 50 pulse modulation at 900 MHz 10 V m with 50 pulse modulation at 1 89 GHz HF conductance on cables Test voltage 10 V with 80 amplitude modulation of 3 and cable shields in 1 kHz in the 10 kHz to 80 MHz range accordance with IEC 61000 4 6 Emission of radio interference The following table shows the unwanted emissions from electromagnetic fields in accordance with EN 55011 Limit Value Class A Group 1 measured at a distance of 10 m From 30 to 230 MHz lt 40 dB V m quasi peak From 230 to 1000 MHz lt 47 dB V m quasi peak Additional measures Before you connect an HMI device to the public network ensure that it is compliant with Limit Value Class B in accordance with EN 55022 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 42 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Safety instructions and general notes 2 10 Transport and Storage Conditions 2 10 Transport and Storage Conditions Mechanical and climatic transport and storage conditions The transportation and storage conditions of this HMI device exceed requirements in accordance with IEC 61131 2 The following specifications apply to the transportation and storage of an HMI device in its original packaging The climatic co
34. 12 3 RS 465 IF 2 accnbenwiiiana cele Avenel levine gd ell 269 123 2 SB tcc ineine E a a a a aa a a e A S iv bade E EA aAA aa EGEE atest nates 270 12 3 3 RJ45 for connecting Cable DP ou ce cccccesee cee ceteeeeeeeeeeesecsaeeeeeseesecsaeeseenesnesnseeseseeaneaeieaeenee 270 12 3 4 RJ45 for connecting Cable PN ccc cece cece ceeecneeeeeeseeecaeeaeeeesecseesasneeneenseeeseeseeseeaeenee 271 12 3 5 Post connector for connecting cable DP 2 1 12 3 6 Post connector for connecting cable PN 2 12 4 Port assignment on the connection box DP cece secceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeeeeseneaeeseeeaeeeseenaees 272 12 5 Port Assignment on the Connection Box PN ccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeeeeseneaeesenaeeeseenaees 12 6 Port assignment on the connection box DP and connection box PN eeeeeeeeeseeeeeteeeeeeeees 12 7 Wiring Examples for Enabling Switch and STOP Button o oo eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeeeaas A ADD ONGIX it dec TETEE T tend sdenodccacceteceeneaDucaacceeckes olaxsdadi2iissiansseviveass2eddvisd discs vegies igncadize A 1 ESD gudelige ssanie inns E EEEE E A 2 SYVSLOM ALANS cies agtecaes sacs cts agedecs AEE deca andaaeasi ane A 3 Things to remember during configuration 0 22 ee eeeeeeeeenteeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeseeaaeeeeteaeeeeeenateeetaaes k A 3 1 Configuring thetermmnallD ssisesisr eaa E aE k ASLI OVGIVIOW riick an Eir EE ATER EENE EEE EE edadieicbavadee A 3 1 2 Connection Point Recognition vi
35. 30010 The tag could not accept the function result e g Check the tag type of the system function parameter when it has exceeded the value range 30011 A system function could not be executed because Check the parameter value and tag type of the invalid the function was assigned an invalid value or type parameter If a tag is used as a parameter check its in the parameter value 30012 A system function could not be executed because Check the parameter value and tag type of the invalid the function was assigned an invalid value or type parameter If a tag is used as a parameter check its in the parameter value 40000 Linear scaling alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 40010 The system function could not be executed since Check the parameter types in the configuration the parameters could not be converted to a common tag type 40011 The system function could not be executed since Check the parameter types in the configuration the parameters could not be converted to a common tag type Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 288 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Appendix 50000 Data server alarms A 2 System alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 50000 The HMI device is receiving data faster than it is capable of processing Therefore no further data is accepted until all current data have been processed Data exchange then resumes 50001 Data exc
36. 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 F Bit for function key S Bit for key operated switch T1 Bit for left illuminated pushbutton T2 Bit for right illuminated pushbutton l Bit for handwheel pulses forwards D Bit for handwheel pulses backwards The bytes n 6 to n 9 contain the direct key bits for the touch buttons Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 92 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0AB0 Operator controls and displays 5 2 Operator controls of Mobile Panel 277 8 Bit coding The following tables show the bit coding for function keys key operated switch illuminated pushbutton and handwheel e Bit coding of function keys State F1 to F18 Not pressed 0 Pressed 1 e Bit coding of function key LEDs State F1 to F18 LED not illuminated 0 LED is illuminated 1 e Bit coding of key operated switch State S1 So Key position Position 0 0 0 In middle position Position 0 1 Turned in clockwise direction up to stop Position Il 1 0 Turned counter clockwise up to stop e Bit coding of illuminated pushbuttons State T1 T2 Not pressed 0 0 Pressed 1 1 e Bit coding of illuminated pushbutton LEDs LED status T1 T2 Off 0 0 On permanently 1 1 e Bit coding of handwheel A setpoint is not specified for the handwheel After start up of the HMI device the bytes n 4 to n 5 are set to zero
37. 4 2007 e Requirements for interference immunity DIN EN 61000 6 2 2005 Residential use Note The HMI device is not suitable for use in residential areas If you use the HMI device in residential areas the radio TV reception may be impeded If the HMI device is used in a residential area you must take measures to achieve Limit Class B conforming to EN 55011 for RF interference A suitable measure for achieving the required RF interference level for Limit Class B includes for example e Use of filters in electrical supply lines Individual acceptance is required Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO 37 Safety instructions and general notes 2 6 Risk analysis 2 6 Risk analysis Carrying out a risk analysis The following standards must be used to perform the risk analysis e EN ISO 12100 1 and EN ISO 12100 2 General design guidelines for machines e EN 1050 Risk Assessment for Machinery e EN 954 1 Safety of Machinery These considerations lead to a safety category B 1 2 3 4 in accordance with EN 954 1 that ultimately dictates how the safety related aspects of the system to be monitored are to be furnished The connection examples with three different monitoring devices show how the safety related parts of the Mobile Panel 277 can achieve safety category 3 according to EN 954 1 Attention must be paid that the overall concept of the system is designed with thi
38. All contacts of the safety relay contactor KA and KB are fitted with positively driven contacts in accordance with EN 50205 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Technical specifications 12 7 Wiring Examples for Enabling Switch and STOP Button Connection example 1 Enabling button with safety circuit device The following figure shows the connection of a SIRIUS 3TK2841 safety circuit device to the enabling button of the Mobile Panel Enabling button left Enabling button right 3 stage 2 circuit 3 stage 2 circuit 123 Grei 321 x o ircui A Mobile Panel Evaluation electronics ZX Circuit 1 ZX Circuit 2 Connection cable Connection box Plus or connection box Monitoring device KA KB 1 1 ee ae I I ___1 ___19 All contacts of the safety relay contactor KA and KB are fitted with positively driven contacts in accordance with EN 50205 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 283 Technical specifications 12 7 Wiring Examples for Enabling Switch and STOP Button Connection example 2 STOP button with safety circuit device The following figure shows the connection of a SIRIUS 3TK2822 or SIRIUS 3TK2841 to the STOP button of the Mobile Panel STOP button 2 circuit positive opening Mobile Panel Circuit 1 ra a gt Connection cable 12 pin STOP24 Z 8 STOP23 S
39. All specifications in mm Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 257 Technical specifications 12 1 Dimension drawings Side view All specifications in mm Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 258 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Technical specifications 12 1 Dimension drawings 12 1 2 Mobile Panel 277 10 Front view All dimensions in mm 320 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 259 Technical specifications 12 1 Dimension drawings Side view All dimensions in mm Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 260 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Technical specifications 12 1 Dimension drawings 12 1 3 Wall holder 202 a 100 40 E Y T N loe y S T N N All specifications in mm 261 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0AB0 Technical specifications 12 1 Dimension drawings 12 1 4 Connection box DP All specifications in mm PULL Q 7 Ast Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 262 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Technical specifications 12 1 Dimension drawings 12 1 5 Connection box P
40. Changing HMI device settings Procedure Proceed as follows 1 Select the region from the selection box 2 Change to the Number Currency Time and Date tabs and set the selection boxes to the desired settings 3 Confirm your entries The dialog closes Result The HMI device s regional settings have been changed 6 5 3 Backing up Registry Information Registry information and temporary data You can install and uninstall your own programs on the HMI devices under Windows CE You must save the registry settings after installation or uninstallation You can save the following data to the flash memory e Registry Information e Temporary files Restoring the file system of a memory card If memory cards are used the file system on the memory card may become damaged perhaps due to a power failure The HMI device detects the defective file system on start up or when the memory card is inserted The HMI device can restore the file system automatically or on request Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 132 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Contiguring the operating system 6 5 Changing HMI device settings Requirements You have opened the Persistent Storage tab in the OP Properties dialog box by pressing the OP ie icon OP Properties OK Display Device Touch Save actual registry settings to flash System will start with saved registry Save Registry 2 settings nex
41. HMI device NOTICE The currently valid user data is overwritten in the following cases e Depending on the transfer settings when the project is transferred again e Upon restore of a backed up project e Upon import of the user administration via an operating element Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation The retransferred or restored user data and passwords are valid with immediate effect Limits for user password and user View Number of characters Length of user name maximum 40 Length of password minimum 3 Length of password maximum 24 Entries in user view maximum 50 8 12 2 User view Application The user view is used to display the users on the HMI device e All users on the HMI device are displayed in the user view to the administrator or to a user with administrator authorizations e If you are a user without user management authorization you can only see your personal user entry The authorizations of a user after logging on depends on the user group to which the user is assigned Please refer to your system documentation to check whether additional information on this subject is available there Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 213 Operating a project 8 12 Project security Layout The configuration engineer can implement a simple or extended user view The two user views off
42. IP server functionality from the HMI device via the network However you cannot for example access data on the HMI device from a PC via the network Note Information on communication using SIMATIC S7 via PROFINET is provided in the WinCC flexible communication user manual Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 149 Configuring the operating system 6 8 Contiguring network operation Addressing Within a PROFINET network computers are usually addressed using computer names These computer names are translated from a DNS or WINS server to TCP IP addresses This is why a DNS or WINS server is needed for addressing via computer names when the HMI device is in a PROFINET network The corresponding servers are generally available in PROFINET networks Note The use of TCP IP addresses to address PCs is not supported by the operating system Consult your network administrator if you have questions in this regard Printing via a network printer The HMI device s operating system does not support line by line alarm logging via a network printer All other printing functions for example hardcopy or logs are available without restriction via the network Preparation Before beginning the configuration request the following network parameters from your network administrator e Does the network use DHCP for dynamic assignment of network addresses If not ge
43. If the value is selected use this key to delete the selected part of the value The Del key deletes the character positioned to the right of the cursor If the value is selected use this key to delete the selected part of the value Using key it is possible to switch between the keyboard levels of the screen keyboard On switchover the key assignments of the screen keyboard change Use the Help key to display the infotext of the I O field This button is only enabled if infotext has been configured for the input object or the current screen ESC Either action closes the screen keyboard You have changed the alphanumeric value or entered a new one 8 4 4 Entering the date and time Entering the date and time Enter the date and time in the same way you enter alphanumerical values Note When entering the date and time please note that the format is determined by the configured project language See also Entering and editing alphanumerical values Page 197 Setting the project language Page 193 198 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Operating a project 8 4 Entering values using the touch screen 8 4 5 Entering symbolic values Drop down list box Operating elements for entering symbolic values offer you a list from which you can select the input values When you touch a symbolic I O field on the HMI device touch screen the following d
44. Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0AB0 Index Key operated switch Mobile Panel Project Recipe menu 246 Recipe screen 239 2 Safety instruction Switches 203 Trend view 206 With external keyboard 190 With external mouse Operating instructions Purpose of Scope Operating mode Operating safet Standards 36 Operating system Configuring Safety instruction Update via ProSave Update via WinCC flexible Updating 167 179 Operation feedback Operator control Recipe view 239 Operator controls Data consistency 320 Evaluating 8 Function 79 Selection 80 Simple recipe view Optical feedback Option Installing 167 Installing with ProSave Installing with WinCC flexible Removing 167 Removing with ProSave Removing with WinCC flexible Options Network operation 120 Overall dimensions Connection box DP 262 Mobile Panel 277 Wall holder Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO P Panic activation Enabling button 90 Parameter assignment Data channel 120 Password 212 Backing up 213 Restoring 213 Specifying 128 Password list 2 Password properties 119 Password protection 116 119 Activate 128 Deactivating PC PPI Cable 74 PC PPI cable 26 PELV 68 Permission in remote control Pin assignment Post connector 271 272 RJ45 plug connector 270 RS 485
45. Observe the next previous system alarms Check the parameters of the control request Recompile the configuration 220000 WinCC channel adapter alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 220001 The tag is not downloaded because the associated Change the configuration communication driver HMI device does not support the download of Boolean discrete data types 220002 The tag is not downloaded because the associated Change the configuration communication driver HMI device does not support write access to the data type BYTE Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO 303 Appendix A 2 System alarms the specified port The port may be in use by another application or the port used is not available on the destination device There is no communication with the PLC Number Effect causes Remedy 220003 The communication driver cannot be loaded The Install the driver by reinstalling WinCC flexible driver may not be installed Runtime 220004 Communication is down and no update data is Check the connection transferred because the cable is not connected or defective etc 220005 Communication is up 220006 The connection between the specified PLC and the specified port is active 220007 The connection to the specified PLC is interrupted Check whether at the specified port e The cable is plugged in e The PLC is OK
46. Panel 2 MAC Adress 08 00 06 2B AC 93 Check box for enabling or locking the PROFINET IO direct keys Text box for the device name MAC address of the HMI device 1 Select the PROFINET IO enabled check box to enable PROFINET IO direct keys 2 Enter the device name of the HMI device NOTICE The device name must match the device name entered in the HW Config of STEP 7 This device name is not the device name under Windows CE 3 Confirm your entries The dialog closes 4 Reboot the HMI device after saving the settings Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0AB0 Configuring the operating system 6 8 Configuring network operation Result The PROFINET IO direct keys are enabled See also Restarting the HMI Device Page 138 6 8 Configuring network operation 6 8 1 Overview of network operation Introduction You can connect the HMI device to a PROFINET network via the Ethernet port The connection to a network offers for example the following options e Printing via a network printer e Saving exporting and importing of recipe data records on or from a server e Setting up of message and data archives e Transferring a project e Saving data NOTICE The HMI device can only be used in PROFINET networks The HMI device only has client functionality in the PC network This means that users can access files of a node with TCP
47. Panel 277 WinCC flexible 78 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Operator controls and displays 5 5 1 Overview 5 1 1 Mobile Panel 277 8 SIEMENS STOP button Display with touch screen Covers for the labeling strip guides Key operated switch Handwheel Membrane keyboard PB QOOOOHO Illuminated pushbutton Operator control functions The functions assigned to the function keys the handwheel the key operated switch and the illuminated pushbuttons are determined during configuration The above mentioned operator controls do not function outside of a project Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 79 Operator controls and displays 5 1 Overview Evaluation and selection of the operator controls The following information can be transferred between the HMI device and the PLC e Direction pulses of the handwheel e Status of the function keys e Status of the key operated switch e State of the illuminated pushbuttons e State of the LEDs of the function keys and illuminated pushbuttons There are two ways of transferring information e Direct keys e System functions of WinCC flexible Standard input unit The standard input unit on the HMI device is the touch screen All operator control objects required for touch operation are displayed on the touch screen once the HMI device has started NOTICE Damage to the touch screen Never touch t
48. Properties dialog box by pressing the System an icon System Properties Ok Ba General Memory Device Name System Microsoft Windows CE Version 5 00 Build 1400 Computer Processor Type intel ARM920T PX4A2 Expansion Slots B Memory 96096 KB RAM Registered to 2004 Microsoft Corp All rights reserved This computer program is protected by U S and international copyright laws Copyright to Microsoft Windows CE Information about the processor size of the internal flash memory and capacity of a memory card when inserted Displaying the system information The system information is displayed This dialog is read only Close the dialog Procedure for displaying memory information NOTICE Memory tab Do not change the memory distribution in the Memory tab Only applies for the usage of options An alteration to the memory distribution may be necessary Please refer to the accompanying documentation for further information Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 140 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Configuring the operating system 6 6 Setting the Delay Time Proceed as follows 1 Change to the Memory tab The memory information is displayed System Properties General Memory Move slider to the left for more memory to run programs Move slider to the right for more storage room Only unused RAM can b
49. The box ID of the connection box to which the mobile panel is connected is transferred to the PLC See also Setting the box ID at the connection box Page 56 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 319 Appendix A 3 Things to remember during configuration A 3 2 Introduction Ensuring consistent values for operator controls The WinCC flexible system functions can be used to evaluate the operator controls of the HMI device and to activate the LEDs of the function keys and illuminated pushbuttons The states of the following control elements are then transferred to the PLC via tags Direction pulses of the handwheel The switching state of the function keys The switching state of the key operated switch The switching state of the illuminated pushbuttons NOTICE Ensuring data consistency The direct assignment of an operator control tag to a process can lead to data inconsistency and malfunctions The tag values for operator controls must be consistent You must make provisions for consistency when you configure your project in WinCC flexible Development of data inconsistency Procedure 320 The direct assignment of a tag with process interconnection to an operator control can lead to inconsistent values at the operator control HMI device and the PLC 1 2 3 The HMI device is connected to the connection box The HMI device starts The values
50. The two states are displayed by the label on the slider Depending on the switching state the switch is labeled with one of two texts or one of two graphics Examples Backward or Forward Switch with slider Proceed as follows Move the slider to the other position or double click the slider area Switch with text or graphic Proceed as follows Touch the switch The switch changes its appearance The associated value is switched Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 203 Operating a project 8 8 Operating the slider control 8 8 Operating the slider control Introduction The slider control can be used to monitor and change process values within a defined range The slider control can also be configured without a slider In this case you cannot enter a value The slider control is then only used for displaying values SIMATIC Slider control for entering values Value display with current value Slider control example Layout The layout of the slider control depends on the configuration e The slider control can contain a label and a setting range e The current value can be displayed below the area of the slider control Procedure Proceed as follows 1 Touch the slider of the desired slider control 2 Move the slider to the required value If a value display has been configured you can check the exact value that has been set 3 Release the
51. USB memory stick Network drive 1 The number of recipe data records might be restricted by the capacity of the storage medium Logs Note The HMI devices are suitable for the logging of relatively small volumes of data Manage the data in several adjacent archives in a segmented circular archive The use of a large circular archive has a negative effect on performance Object Specification Mobile Panel 277 Logs Number of logs 20 Number of sub archives with segmented circular log 400 Entries in each log including all partial logs 10 000 Filing format CSV with ANSI character set Memory location e Memory card 1 e USB memory stick e Network drive 1 The number of entries in the log may be restricted by the capacity of the storage medium Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 28 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Overview 7 5 Functional scope with WinCC flexible Safety Object Specification Mobile Panel 277 Safety Number of user groups 50 Number of users 50 Number of authorizations 32 Infotexts Object Specification Mobile Panel 277 Infotext Length no of characters 320 depending on font For alarms Yes For screens Yes For screen objects for example for I O field switch button Yes invisible button Additional functions Object Specification Mobile Panel 277 Monitor s
52. and is not interrupted This is independent of whether the Mobile Panel 277 is connected to the connection box or not and STOP button not activated This functionality is only available in the connection box Plus Awwarnine Mobile Panel 277 with STOP button If the Mobile Panel 277 is equipped with a STOP button and is not connected to the connection box a Stop cannot be initiated using the Mobile Panel 277 The STOP button of the Mobile Panel 277 is then ineffective Install stationary Emergency Stop buttons that are available at all times on the system being monitored Category 0 or 1 Stop If a Category 0 or 1 Stop circuit is implemented the stop function must be in effect regardless of the operating mode A Category 0 Stop must have precedence Releasing the STOP button must not initiate any dangerous state see also EN 60204 1 1997 chapter 9 2 5 3 The stop function is not to be used as a replacement for safety equipment NOTICE Several connection boxes Install only one type of connection box i e connection box Plus or connection box Basic for monitoring your system STOP button can be activated if the panel is dropped The standstill of the monitored system can be activated under the following conditions The Mobile Panel 277 is connected to the connection box and the STOP button is activated due to the Mobile Panel 277 falling down or being dropped Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible O
53. backup and restore HMI device data for example The following options are available for setting Transfer mode on the HMI device e When the HMI device starts up Start Transfer mode manually in the HMI device Loader e During ongoing operation Start the Transfer mode manually within the project using an operating element The HMI device toggles to Transfer mode when automatic mode is set and a transfer is initiated on the configuring PC Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 166 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Commissioning a project 7 3 Using existing projects 7 3 Using existing projects You can use existing projects from Mobile Panels 170 and 177 The following cases are possible 1 Old project exists in ProTool Migrate the project to WinCC flexible and subsequently carry out an HMI device switch 2 Old project exists in WinCC flexible Carry out an HMI device switch in WinCC flexible Further information on the subject can be found in the WinCC flexible Online Help or in the WinCC flexible Migration manual 7 4 Data Transmission Options Overview The following table shows the options for data transfer between Mobile Panel 277 and a configuring PC Type Data channel Mobile Panel 277 Backing up Serial 1 Yes MPI PROFIBUS DP Yes USB Yes Ethernet Yes Restoring Serial 1 Yes MPI PROFIBUS DP Yes USB Yes Ethernet Yes Updating th
54. been removed on the HMI device See also Operating modes Page 166 Data Transmission Options Page 167 Configuring the data channel Page 145 Overview Page 182 7 9 Transferring and transferring license keys 7 9 1 Overview Transferring and transferring back license keys With the purchase of an optional package you obtain a specific user license with an associated license key Once you have installed an option transfer a license key to the HMI device The license key unlocks an option for use You can also transfer back the license key from the HMI device to a license diskette Note License keys can only be transferred and transferred back with the Automation License Manager or WinCC flexible 7 9 2 Transferring and transferring back license keys Requirements e The HMI device is connected to a configuring PC e When transferring or transferring back using WinCC flexible No project is open in WinCC flexible e The data channel is configured on the HMI device e The license diskette with the license key to be transferred must be inserted in the floppy drive of the configuring PC Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 185 Commissioning a project 7 9 Transferring and transferring license keys Procedure for transferring a license key Proceed as follows Result 186 1 2 Switch to Transfer mode on the HMI device When transferring using WinCC flexible
55. button can be activated if the panel is dropped The standstill of the monitored system can be activated under the following conditions The Mobile Panel 277 is connected to the connection box and the STOP button is activated due to the Mobile Panel 277 falling down or being dropped Enabling Switch The enabling device consists of two enabling buttons which are installed on the left and right side of the Mobile Panel 277 The switch setting of the two enabling buttons is determined by electrical switches The associated evaluation logic is dual channel This means one channel processes the enabling button information digitally and the second channel in analog fashion This helps with signal security diversity NOTICE AND linking is not permitted Both channels can run staggered signals This is why both channels should not be linked using the Boolean operator AND but only with an OR The figure below shows the enabling button Enabling button Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO 101 Operator controls and displays 5 3 Operator controls of Mobile Panel 277 10 Operation You only have to activate one enabling button It is not possible for the open loop control to evaluate whether Mobile Panel 277 is operated with one hand or with both Note The enabling buttons and the membrane keyboard can be operated simultaneously because there is no electrical connection betwe
56. button is required for the confirmation of axis movements The enabling button is optimally accessible The enabling button triggers a safety shutdown in the event of a panic reaction to danger release or cramping The STOP button can also be quickly reached with your free hand Holding the Mobile Panel for entering data NOTICE If you are manually controlling potentially dangerous movements in the special operating modes you must use the above shown forearm holding method Use this forearm holding method for example to quickly reach the STOP button or press down the enabling button in the event of a dangerous situation If only entering data without controlling potentially dangerous movements you can hold the HMI device with both hands on its left and right side without deploying the forearm method Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 109 Operator controls and displays 5 6 Holding the Mobile Panel and attaching it to the wall holder Attaching the Mobile Panel 277 to a wall holder A wall holder is available for securely fixing the HMI device in position The wall holder can be used to operate your Mobile Panel 277 as a stationary HMI device The following figure shows an HMI device attached to the wall holder using Mobile Panel 277 8 as an example NOTICE Operability If the HMI device is hooked into an unsuitable wall holder the operability of th
57. button to confirm your entry The time of day shown in the Current Time box is adjusted correspondingly to the selected time zone 3 Set the date in the selection field 4 Set the current time of day in the Current Time input field 5 Confirm your input by clicking on the Apply button The values you have set are now in effect Note The system does not automatically switch between winter and summer time If you want to switch from winter to summer time select the Daylight savings time currently in effect check box When you press the Apply button the time is brought forward by one hour If you want to switch from summer to winter time clear the Daylight savings time currently in effect check box When you press the Apply button the time is taken backward by one hour Confirm your entries The dialog closes The settings for the data and time of day have now been changed The HMI device must be restarted after changes in the following cases e You have changed the time zone setting e You have changed the Daylight savings time currently in effect check box setting The HMI device has an internal buffered clock Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO Configuring the operating system 6 5 Changing HMI device settings Synchronizing the date and time with the PLC The date and time of the HMI device can be synchronized with the PLC
58. by pressing the Certificates icon Certificates Class 2 Public Primary Certification Authority Entrust net Certification Authority 2048 Entrust net Secure Server Certification Authorit Equifax Secure Certificate Authority GlobalSign Root CA iy Import view Remove Lists the certificates trusted by you Proceed as follows 1 Select the type of certificate from the selection box Trusted Authorities My Certificates Other Certificates 2 You can start the import by pressing the Import button A dialog with source details will open 3 If required delete the certificate Mark the desired certificate Delete the selected certificate by pressing the Remove button 4 Press the View button to list the properties of the selected certificate 5 Close the dialog The changes to the certificates have been undertaken Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 159 Configuring the operating system 6 9 Backup and Restore with the Memory Card 6 9 Backup and Restore with the Memory Card Introduction Backup involves copying the operating system applications and data from the internal flash memory of the HMI device to a memory card A restore operation deletes the old data from flash memory of the HMI device on confirmation The data stored on the memory card is then copied to the internal flash memory caution
59. conditions for example due to Corrosive vapors gases oils or chemicals Electrical or magnetic fields of high intensity e In systems that require special monitoring for example Elevators Systems in especially hazardous rooms Mechanical ambient conditions The following table shows the mechanical ambient conditions for the HMI device in the form of sinusoidal vibration Frequency band Constant Occasional in Hz 10 lt f lt 58 Amplitude 0 0375 mm Amplitude 0 075 mm 58 lt f lt 150 Constant acceleration 0 5 g Constant acceleration 1 g Reducing vibrations If the HMI device is subjected to greater shocks or vibrations you must take appropriate measures to reduce acceleration or amplitudes We recommend fitting the HMI device to vibration absorbent material on metal shock absorbers for example Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO 45 Planning application 3 1 Notes about Usage Testing mechanical ambient conditions The following table provides information on the type and scope of tests for mechanical ambient conditions Tested for Test standard Comments Vibrations Vibration test in accordance Type of vibration with IEC 60068 part 2 6 Transitional rate of the frequency sinusoidal 1 octave minute 10 lt f lt 58 constant amplitude 0 075 mm 58 lt f lt 150 Constant acceleration 1 g Vibration durat
60. data record NOTICE Changed tag name Tags and the value of the recipe data record cannot be assigned to each other if the tag name of the tag to be synchronized has been changed The tags in question are not synchronized Note Recipe tags can only be synchronized in the enhanced recipe view A screen with a recipe view is displayed Proceed as follows 1 If the recipe view contains several recipes Select the recipe which contains the desired recipe data record 2 Select the recipe data record you want to synchronize 3 Touch S The elements of the recipe data record are synchronized with the recipe tags If the values of the recipe view and the tag do not match the more current value is accepted Recipes in the project Page 232 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Operating recipes 10 6 Operating the recipe view 10 6 6 Reading a recipe data record from the PLC Introduction In the current project the values which are also stored in the recipes in the HMI device can be changed directly in the plant This is the case for example if a valve was opened further directly at the plant than is stored in the recipe The values of the recipe data records saved in the HMI device possibly no longer match the values in the PLC To synchronize the recipe values read the values from the PLC and display them in the recipe view Requirements A
61. device the device automatically sets Transfer mode when a restore operation is initiated 8 Start the restore operation in WinCC flexible with OK on the configuring PC Follow the instructions in WinCC flexible A status view opens to indicate the progress of the operation When the restore is successfully completed the data backed up on the configuring PC is now on the HMI device Operating modes Page 166 Data Transmission Options Page 167 Configuring the data channel Page 145 Overview Page 174 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO Commissioning a project 7 6 Backup and restore 7 6 3 Backup and restore using ProSave Requirements The HMI device is connected to a PC on which ProSave is installed The data channel is configured on the HMI device Procedure for backup Proceed as follows 1 2 3 Result From the Windows Start menu start ProSave on the PC Select the HMI device type in the General tab Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the PC Set the connection parameters Select the data to be backed up in the Backup tab Select a destination folder and a file name for the psb backup file Set Transfer mode on the HMI device If automatic transfer mode is enabled on the HMI device the HMI device automatically sets Transfer mode when a backup is initiated Start the backup operation in ProSave
62. dialog names tabs buttons menu entries e Inputs required for example limit values tag values e Path information File gt Edit Operational sequences for example menu commands shortcut menu commands lt F1 gt lt Alt P gt Keyboard operation Please observe notes labeled as follows Note Notes contain important information concerning the product its use or a specific section of the documentation to which you should pay particular attention Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Preface Registered trademarks Names labeled with a symbol are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG Other names used in this documentation may be trademarks the use of which by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner e HMI e SIMATIC e SIMATIC HMI e SIMATIC ProTool e SIMATIC WinCC SIMATIC WinCC flexible Representatives and offices Training center If you have any further questions relating to the products described in this manual please contact your local representative at the Siemens branch nearest you Find your contact person at http www siemens com automation partner Siemens AG offers a variety of training courses in order to familiarize you with automation systems Please contact your regional training center or our central training center in 90327 Nuremberg Germany for details Ph
63. e With enabling button and STOP button e With enabling button STOP button handwheel key operated switch and two illuminated pushbuttons Front view SIEMENS STOP button optional Display with touch screen Covers for the labeling strip guides Key operated switch optional Handwheel optional Membrane keyboard PGB QOHOOHO Illuminated pushbutton optional Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 17 Overview 7 2 Design of the HMI device Side view Fall protection for the STOP button Enabling buttons on the left and right side of the HMI device Cable inlet Handle Rear view Rating label Handle Connection bay cover Cable inlet USB port and plugs 0000o Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 18 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Overview 7 2 Design of the HMI device 1 2 3 Structure of Mobile Panel 277 10 Front view STOP button Display with touch screen Side view iy pe O 2 Impact guards Enabling buttons on the left and right side of the HMI device Handle Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 19 Overview 1 3 Accessory kit for Mobile Panel 277 8 Rear view Rating label Holder for the touch pen Handle Connection bay cover USB port and plugs Cable inlet Touch pens are available as accessories s
64. example E Stand 5 corresponds to version 5 The USB PPI cable is not included with the HMI device The cable is available with order number 6ES7 901 3DB30 0XA0 1 4 7 Protective foil The protective foil prevents the touch screen from being scratched or soiled The protective foil kit is not included with the HMI device The 10 piece protective foil kit has the following order numbers e 6AV6671 5BC00 0AX0 for Mobile Panel 277 8 e 6AV6645 7AB15 0AS0 for Mobile Panel 277 10 1 4 8 Touch pens The touch pens make it easier to operate the touch screen The touch pen set is not included with the HMI device The set of 5 touch pens is available with order number GAV6645 7AB14 0AS0 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 26 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Overview 7 5 Functional scope with WinCC flexible 1 4 9 Memory card You can use a memory card to back up data from the HMI device and to copy data onto the HMI device Only use the SD memory cards or multimedia cards tested and released by Siemens A memory card i is not included with the HMI device The memory card can be ordered using emens online ttp mall automation siemens com alog For additional information refer to the Internet at 1 5 Functional scope with WinCC flexible The following tables show the objects that can be integrated into a project for a Mobile Panel 277 Alarms Object Specific
65. for changing user data in the extended user view Proceed as follows 1 In the user view touch the user whose user data you want to change 2 When entering the data use exactly the same procedure as for creating a user Result The user data for the user is changed Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 218 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Operating a project 8 13 Closing the project 8 12 7 Deleting users Requirements You have opened a screen containing the user view To delete a user you must be an administrator or have user management authorization Note The Admin and PLC_User users exist by default These users cannot be deleted Procedure To delete a user delete the user name entered Result The user has been deleted and may no longer log onto the project 8 13 Closing the project Procedure Proceed as follows 1 Use the corresponding operator control object to close the project Wait for the loader to open after you closed the project 2 Switch off power to the HMI device Note Recovery time Wait for approximately one second after you have removed the connecting cable from the connection box before you plug the connecting cable back into the connection box Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 219 Operating a project 8 13 Closing the project Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 220 Operating Instructions 08 200
66. function key should be pressed ina running project Bit assignment The following table shows the bit assignment for the status tags of the illuminated pushbuttons Bit 0 0 Status of the illuminated pushbutton Not pressed 1 Pressed The following table shows the bit assignment for the LED tags of the illuminated pushbuttons Bit n 1 Bit n LED status 0 0 Off 0 1 Flashing quickly 1 0 Flashing slowly 1 1 ON continuous Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO 97 Operator controls and displays 5 3 Operator controls of Mobile Panel 277 10 5 3 Operator controls of Mobile Panel 277 10 5 3 1 STOP button 5 3 1 1 Overview Overview The STOP button is designed with two circuits and allows a safety related stop of the system being monitored The STOP button meets safety category 3 in accordance with EN 954 1 when used in combination with an external monitoring device Please refer to the Safety instructions and general notes chapter for further safety instructions The stop circuit of the system to be monitored retains the closed state when you disconnect Mobile Panel 277 10 from the connection box Possible application areas for the STOP button e The STOP button can be used to initiate a process cycle specific rapid stop of a monitored system plant machine or machine zone The Stop operation can occur wit
67. hidden again when input is complete Alphanumerical screen keyboard normal level Note Opened screen keyboard When the screen keyboard is open PLC job 51 Select screen has no function Language change Language change in the project has no influence on the alphanumerical screen keyboard The entry of Cyrillic or Asian chracters is therefore not possible The alphanumerical screen keyboard has various levels e Normal level e Shift level If you change the levels with key _ the key assignments change Alphanumerical values can be entered character by character via the buttons on the alphanumerical screen keyboard Proceed as follows 1 Touch the desired operating element within the screen The alphanumerical screen keyboard opens The existing value is displayed in the screen keyboard and is selected Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 197 Operating a project 8 4 Entering values using the touch screen Result Enter the value You have the following options to enter a value Use the lt key to confirm your entry or cancel it with The selected value is deleted when you enter the first character Completely reenter the value Use the and E keys to move the cursor within the current value You can now edit the characters of the current value or add characters Use the key to delete the character to the left of the cursor
68. infotext The infotext configured for the simple recipe view is displayed 2 Open The record list of the selected recipe opens e Record list No Menu command Functions 0 New A new recipe data record is created for the selected recipe If a start value is configured it is shown in the input field Delete The displayed record is deleted 2 Save as The selected record is saved under a different name irrespective of the simple recipe view A dialog box opens in which the name is entered 3 Rename The selected record is renamed A dialog box opens in which the name is entered Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 245 Operating recipes 10 7 Operating the simple recipe view e Element list No Menu command Functions 0 Save The selected record is renamed To PLC The display values of the selected record are transferred from the HMI device to the PLC 2 From PLC The recipe values from the PLC are displayed on the HMI device in the recipe view 3 Save as The data record is saved under the new name A dialog box opens in which the name is entered Operating the menu Touch the desired menu command The command is executed Operating the recipe screen You operate the recipes in a recipe screen with the operator controls provided by the configuration engineer Further information on this may be availab
69. logs data because itis the event and press it full 80033 System Defined is set in the data log file as the Reinstall SQL Sever 2005 Express data source name This causes an error No data is written to the database logs whereas the logging to the CSV logs works 80034 An error has occurred in the initialization of the No action is necessary However it is recommended to logs An attempt has been made to create the save the backup files or delete them in order to make tables as a backup This action was successful A the space available again backup has been made of the tables of the corrupted log file and the cleared log was restarted 80035 An error has occurred in the initialization of the It is recommended to save the backups or to delete logs An attempt has been made to create backups them in order to release memory of the tables and this has failed No logging or backup has been performed 80044 The export of a log was interrupted because The export resumes automatically Runtime was closed or due to a power failure It was detected that the export needed to be resume when Runtime restarted 80045 The export of a log was interrupted due to an error The export is repeated automatically Check in the connection to the server or at the server e The connection to the server itself e Ifthe server is running e If there is enough free space on the server 80046 The destination file could not be written while Check whether the
70. longer contains all the alarms However all alarms are written to the alarm buffer 270002 The view shows alarms of a log for which there is Delete older log data if necessary no data in the current project Wildcards are output for the alarms 270003 The service cannot be set up because too many Reduce the number of HMI devices which want to use devices want to use this service the service A maximum of four devices may execute this action 270004 Access to persistent buffer is not possible Alarms If the problems persist at the next startup contact cannot be restored or saved Customer Support delete Flash 270005 Persistent buffer damaged Alarms cannot be If the problems persist at the next startup contact restored Customer Support delete Flash 270006 Project modified Alarms cannot be restored from The project was generated and transferred new to the the persistent buffer HMI device The error should no longer occur when the device starts again 270007 A configuration problem is preventing the restore Update the operating system and then transfer your a DLL is missing a directory is unknown etc project again to the HMI device 280000 DPHMI alarms Connection Number Effect causes Remedy 280000 Connection is up because the cause of the interruption has been eliminated 280001 No more data is read or written Possible causes Check whether e The cable is defective e The PLC does not res
71. low speed and full speed USB devices e Maximum load 500 mA 1xRS 45 For PROFIBUS DP 1 x plug in terminal strips 10 pin For PROFIBUS DP 1xRS 45 For PROFINET 1 x plug in terminal strips 12 pin For PROFINET Supply voltage Supply voltage Via connection box Additional specifications Fall height Max 1 2 m Buffer time with internal clock e Without rechargeable battery e With rechargeable battery Approx 3 days Approx 6 months 12 2 2 Mobile Panel 277 10 HMI device Weight without packing Approx 2 3 kg Display Type Color TFT LC Display Display area active W x H 211 2 mm x 158 4 mm 10 Resolution 800 x 600 pixels Colors displayable 64k colors Brightness control Yes Back lighting CCFL Half Brightness Life Time typical 50 000 h Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO 265 Technical specifications 12 2 Specifications Input unit Type Touch screen analog resistive Enabling button 2 circuit 3 level Connection voltage 24 VDC Amperage max 400 mA Amperage min 10 mA STOP button optional 2 circuit Connection voltage 24 VDC Amperage max 500 mA Amperage min 10 mA These are normally closed contacts Memory Application memory 6 MB Ports 1x RS 485 Max 12 Mbit s 1 x USB e US
72. management authorization or you are the administrator NOTICE The following characters cannot be used in passwords e Blank e Special characters Procedure for creating a user in the simple user view Proceed as follows 1 Touch the lt New User gt entry in the user view The following dialog opens User Password OK Cancel Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 216 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Operating a project 8 12 Project security 2 Enter the desired user name and password Touch the corresponding text box The alphanumerical screen keyboard is displayed 3 Touch the OK button The following dialog opens xi Group Group 1 Logoff time 5 carca 4 Assign the user to a group In order to do so open the Groups drop down list by means of the Z button Select 4 and to scroll in the drop down list box 5 Touch the required entry in the drop down list box The selected entry is then accepted as input 6 Touch the text box Logoff time The screen keyboard is displayed 7 Enter a value between 0 and 60 for the logoff time in minutes The value 0 stands for no automatic logoff 8 Touch the OK button to confirm your entries Procedure for creating a user in the enhanced user view Proceed as follows 1 Touch the desired field in the blank line of the user view The appropriate screen keyboard is displayed 2 Switc
73. mounting the wall holder NOTICE In order to ensure that the HMI device can be hooked in securely select a vertical surface or one inclined slightly to the rear as the mounting surface For HMI device with STOP button The HMI device can fall down if it is not securely hooked in In the process the STOP button might be triggered unintentionally thus causing the machine or system to stop Note Positioning A position at eye level is recommended This enables the Mobile Panel 277 to be operated when it is hooked into the wall holder Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO 51 Installation and connection 4 2 Mounting the Connection Box and Wall Holder Proceed as follows 1 Select a position for the wall holder that is easy and safe to reach 2 Place the wall holder from the front onto the mounting surface 3 Mark the mounting holes with a marking tool 4 5 Attach the wall holder Drill three through holes or three threaded holes M5 Procedure for mounting the connection box Note Length of the connecting cable Allow for the maximum length of the connecting cable when selecting the position for the connection box Proceed as follows 1 2 3 4 Select a position for the connection box that is easy and safe to reach Place the connection box from the front onto the mounting surface Mark the mounting holes with a marking
74. number exists e The record number exist e The Overwrite function parameter is set 290026 An attempt has been made to read write a record Set the record status to zero although the record is not free at present This error may occur in the case of recipes for which downloading with synchronization has been configured 290027 Unable to connect to the PLC at present As a Check the connection to the PLC result the record can neither be read nor written Possible causes No physical connection to the PLC no cable plugged in cable is defect or the PLC is switched off 290030 This alarm is output after you selected screen Reload the record from the storage location or retain which contains a recipe view in which a record is the current values already selected 290031 While saving it was detected that a record with the Overwrite the record or cancel the action specified number already exists 290032 While exporting records it was detected that a file Overwrite the file or cancel the process with the specified name already exists 290033 Confirmation request before deleting records 290040 A record error with error code 1 that cannot be Check the storage location the record the Data described in more detail occurred record area pointer and if necessary the connection The action is canceled to the PLC It is possible that the record was not installed Restart the action after a short time correctly on the PLC If the error persists
75. numerical and alphanumerical keyboard Switching between the normal level and Shift level of the alphanumerical screen keyboard Activation and deactivation of the numerical and alphanumerical keys of the alphanumerical screen keyboard Switching from full display to reduced display e E a Switching from reduced display to full display Kao Closing of reduced display of the screen keyboard Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 121 Configuring the operating system 6 3 Changing settings for operation Moving the screen keyboard In order to move the screen keyboard proceed as follows Touch the symbol 1 Touch and move the screen keyboard on the touch screen Release the symbol when the required position is reached See also Configuring the Screen Keyboard Page 122 6 3 Changing settings for operation 6 3 1 Configuring the Screen Keyboard Introduction You can change the layout and the position of the screen keyboard as follows Requirements You have opened the Siemens HMI InputPanel Options dialog by pressing the Position and Size Currently not in resizeing mode Start Resize Save current size and positior Save Close Input Panel a ae Button for displaying the screen keyboard Button for saving the screen keyboard settings Button for closing the screen keyboard Mob
76. of the operator control elements are determined and entered in tags on the HMI device 4 Communication between the HMI device and PLC is established 5 After communication has been established the old values of the tags are transferred from the PLC into the tags of the HMI device Not until a change has been carried out to an operator control element is the valid value written into the tag of the HMI device and transferred to the PLC Proceed as follows 1 2 3 Specify the connection to the PLC in the Connections editor Activate the Coordination area pointer to ensure that the life bit is available on the PLC Create three tags in the Tag editor Internal tag Status_Operator_Control External tag Auxiliary tag External tag Operator_Control_PLC Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Appendix A 3 Things to remember during configuration 4 For globally allocated illuminated pushbutton key operated switch and handwheel Open the template in the Screens editor Select the operator control element in the template Click on the General group in the Properties view Select the Status_Control_Element tag at Tag in the Settings section The value is written to the Status_Operator_Control tag after you have activated the operator control You can additionally configure the LED Tag tag for the illuminated pushbuttons in ord
77. on the motherboard Key on the HMI device which supports user specific functions A function is assigned to the key in the configuration The assignment of the keys may be specific to an active screen or not Half Brightness Life Time Hardcopy 326 Time period after which the brightness reaches 50 of the original value The specified value is dependent on the operating temperature Output of the screen content to a printer Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO Glossary HMI device An HMI device is a device used for the operation and monitoring of machines and plants The statuses of the machine or plant are indicated by means of graphic elements or by indicator lamps on the HMI device The operating elements of the HMI device allow the operator to interact with the processes of the machine or plant HMI device image I O field Infotext Object A file that can be transferred from the configuring PC to the HMI device The HMI device image contains the operating system and elements of the runtime software required to runa project An I O field enables the input or output of values on the HMI device which are transferred to the PLC An infotext is a configured information on objects within a project Infotext for an alarm for example may contain information on the cause of the fault and troubleshooting routines An object is a component of a project Example scree
78. only be released under the following conditions The reasons for the stop have been eliminated A safe restart is possible In order to release the STOP button turn it in a clockwise direction The STOP button then returns on its own to the starting position 5 3 1 2 Safety Functions of the STOP Button The STOP button on the Mobile Panel 277 brings about a safety related Stop of the system being monitored in accordance with EN 60204 1 1997 Section 9 2 5 3 You have the option of implementing a Category 0 1 or 2 Stop function in accordance with EN 60204 1 1997 Section 9 2 2 The stop function category must be selected on the basis of a risk assessment The Mobile Panel 277 s Stop function can therefore be used as a reliable machine stop as well as for looping in the Emergency Stop circuit of the system to be monitored The signals of the STOP button are wired differently in the two versions of the connection box In the connection box Plus the signals control the Stop or Emergency Stop circuit of the system being monitored If the Mobile Panel 277 is not connected the Stop or Emergency Stop circuit is closed In the connection box Basic on the other hand the signals of the Stop or Emergency Stop circuit are fed via the STOP button If the Mobile Panel 277 is not connected the Stop or Emergency Stop circuit of the system being monitored is open The term Stop loop through has the following meaning The Stop or Em
79. ou eeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeseaaeeesesnaeeeenianeees 7 7 Updating the operating system 00 0 cece eeteeeeeeee eee eeenneeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeaaeeeseeaaeeesesaeeeseeiaeeeseiane eats 178 7 7 1 WOW GINO E E D EA at Wa eee Paci N ae edge ov E A Taide Pace te econ EE A ES 7 7 2 Reset 10 faclo SOUINGS sci accevecacsacecesscaces ends sacesitenedesssueeveesnsedeenncadcans knsadexaniede seseee send teebeeeaered 7 7 3 Updating the operating system using WinCC flexible 179 7 7 4 Updating the operating system USING PrOSaVE eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeaeeseneaeeeteenaees 7 8 Installing ANd removing OPTIONS 0 0 0 eect e eee eee ee eeeeeeeeceeaeeeeeeeaeeeseaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeeenaeeaaes 7 8 1 OVI WIQW E das conbedes coe shdae lt a pevaciedenec Seu leestedzestesddeansgd E age eondeehitieadtehaentee 182 7 8 2 Installing and removing options using WinCC flexible 7 8 3 Installing and removing options using ProSave 7 9 Transferring and transferring license KOYS ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeseeaeeeseaeeeeeenaeeeneaaes 185 7 9 1 COV GIVIGW oeeaaeaii etal Get eis utes evs aaa eee eae atau Siac cise a wesc r 185 7 9 2 Transferring and transferring back license keys Operating a Project i vasvsccsssedsdsze ceitascecetinins eiatelt r EE E a aTa ANEN EE shinee vite 8 1 OVEIVIGW T E E E E E dated dave dasa easded le eeade altentiedeeia ee 189 8 2 Direct KOy sited cient Alii TE wed hein eae aie 192 8 3 Se
80. possible in the enhanced recipe view Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 236 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Operating recipes 10 5 Recipe values in the HMI device and the PLC 10 5 Recipe values in the HMI device and the PLC Introduction You can change the values of a recipe on the HMI device and therefore influence the manufacturing process or a machine Depending on the configuration the recipe values are displayed edited and saved in different ways e If you are editing recipes with a recipe view in your project the values are saved in recipe data records e If you are editing recipes in a recipe screen in your project the values are saved in recipe tags Differences may occur between the display values in the recipe view and the values saved in the associated tags in an ongoing project when you edit recipes with a recipe view and in a recipe screen To prevent this the recipe data record values must be synchronized with the values of the recipe tags You have however the option to perform synchronization operations at any time Synchronization only takes place if the configuration engineer has activated the respective settings for a recipe Note Recipe tags can only be synchronized in the extended recipe view Synchronizing recipe tags Synchronization of the recipe tags depends on the configuration e Automatic sync
81. process image of the PLC Check for additional information in your plant documentation if necessary Button bits Bytes n to n 4 contain the direct key bits for the touch buttons Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 104 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Operator controls and displays 5 4 Using memory cards 5 4 Using memory cards Requirements The terminal compartment of the Mobile Panel 277 is open Slot Memory card symbol Velcro strip for fastening the memory card Procedure for inserting a memory card Proceed as follows 1 Remove the Velcro strip 2 Insert the memory card into the slot Pay attention to the memory card symbol when inserting the memory card An arrow on the memory card indicates the front side and the direction of insertion When the memory card is correctly inserted into the slot it stands approx 3mm proud of the slot 3 Close the Velcro strip Procedure for unplugging a memory card Proceed as follows 1 Remove the Velcro strip 2 Pull the memory card out of the slot 3 Deposit the memory card in a safe place See also Opening and Closing the Terminal Compartment Page 69 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 105 Operator controls and displays 5 5 Labeling the function keys on Mobile Panel 277 8 5 5 Labeling the function keys on Mobile Panel 277 8 Introduction You can label the fu
82. saved to the selected recipe data record See also Recipes in the project Page 232 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 249 Operating recipes 10 7 Operating the simple recipe view 10 7 6 Transferring a recipe data record to the PLC Introduction In order for an edited recipe data record to take effect in the process you must transfer the values to the PLC The display values in the recipe view are always transferred to the PLC Requirements A screen with a simple recipe view is displayed Procedure Proceed as follows 1 If the recipe list contains several recipes Select the recipe which contains the desired recipe data record 2 Select the element list of the recipe data record whose values you want to transfer to the PLC 3 Open the menu 4 Select the menu command 1 To PLC Result The values of the recipe data record were transferred to the PLC and take effect in the process See also Recipes in the project Page 232 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 250 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Operating recipes 10 8 Exporting a recipe data record 10 8 Exporting a recipe data record Introduction You can export one or more recipe data records to a CSV file depending on the configuration After export the values in the recipe data record can be further processed ina spreadsheet program such as MS Excel The degree to whi
83. screen with a recipe view is displayed Procedure Proceed as follows 1 If the recipe view contains several recipes Select the recipe which contains the desired recipe data record 2 Select the recipe data record to which you want to apply the values from the PLC 3 Touch a The values are read from the PLC i 4 If you want to store the displayed values in the HMI device touch the button Result The values were read from the PLC displayed on the HMI device and saved to the selected recipe data record See also Recipes in the project Page 232 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 243 Operating recipes 10 7 Operating the simple recipe view 10 6 7 Transferring a recipe data record to the PLC Introduction In order for an edited recipe data record to take effect in the process you must transfer the values to the PLC The display values in the recipe view are always transferred to the PLC Requirements A screen with a recipe view is displayed Procedure Proceed as follows 1 If the recipe view contains several recipes Select the recipe which contains the desired recipe data record 2 Select the recipe data record whose values you want to transfer to the PLC 3 Touch in Result The display values in the recipe view were transferred to the PLC and take effect in the process See also Recipes in the project 10 7 Operating the simple r
84. storage cards and the registry will be erased Are you sure At this point you can abort the restore if required in order to prevent the data on the HMI device from being deleted Start to restore the data by pressing the Yes button The following messages are displayed in sequence during the restore Deleting files on flash Restore CE Image A progress bar shows the status of the restoration of the Windows CE image After successful restoration of the Windows CE image the following message is displayed Restore of CE Image is finished The device will be rebooted now Don t remove the storage card Acknowledge this message The HMI device starts The operating system boots opening the Loader and Restore dialog in sequence The restore process is resumed All data stored on the flash file system is restored Afterwards the following message is displayed Restore succesfully finished Press ok remove your storage card and reboot your device Remove the memory card Acknowledge this message The HMI device starts The data from the memory card is now on the HMI device Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Contiguring the operating system See also Displaying Information about the HMI Device Page 139 6 10 Display rechargeable battery charge level Introduction 6 10 Display rechargeable battery charge level The rechargeable
85. that the tags used are of the allowed types the system alarm that may have occurred prior to Check system functions for the correct number and this types of parameters 20011 An error has occurred in a script that was called by In the configuration select the script that has been the specified script called directly or indirectly by the specified script Execution of the script was therefore aborted in the Ensure that the tags used are of the allowed types called script Check system functions for the correct number and Note the system alarm that may have occurred types of parameters prior to this 20012 The configuration data is inconsistent The script Recompile the configuration could therefore not be generated 20013 The scripting component of WinCC flexible Reinstall WinCC flexible Runtime on your PC Runtime is not correctly installed Therefore no Rebuild your project with Project gt Generator gt scripts can be executed Generate and transfer the project to the HMI device 20014 The system function returns a value that is not Select the specified script in the configuration written in any return tag Check whether the script name has been assigned a value 20015 Too many successive scripts have been triggered Find what is triggering the scripts Extend the times e g the polling time of the tags which trigger the scripts 30000 Alarms for IFwSetValue SetValue Number Effect causes Remedy
86. the box ID is forwarded to the PLC correctly when the HMI device is connected undertake the configuration in WinCC flexible as follows 318 1 Specify the connection to the PLC in the Connections editor Activate the Coordination area pointer to ensure that the life bit is available on the PLC Create three tags in the Tag editor Internal tag Internal_Box ID External tag Auxiliary_Tag External tag External_Box ID 3 Open the Device settings editor 4 Select the Internal_Box ID tag at Zone ID Terminal ID in the Settings for Runtime area Runtime settings Runtime services Use on screen keyboard Sm rtAccess or Service Start up Sm rtServer Fl Lock task switching C Sm rtService HTML pages Sm rtAccess Web service SOAP C Sm rtAccess SIMATIC HMI HTTP Server Displays limit tooltips v Function as OPC server Display script comments Name of SMTP server Bit selection in text and graphic lists Name of SMTP sender Bit selection for appearance o SMTP authentication Transfer names Project ID Oo Zone ID Connection point ID bs Disable function keys on modal dialogs _ Release button on leave _ Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Appendix A 3 Things to remember during configuration 5 When you connect the HMI device to the connection box the box ID is written automatically in
87. the command Update OS in the Project gt Transfer menu You can specify operating system updates with or without reset to factory settings by activating deactivating the Reset to factory settings check box Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 179 Commissioning a project 7 7 Updating the operating system Result 7 7 4 8 In Image path select the HMI device image file img The HMI device image files are available under WinCC flexible Images in the WinCC flexible installation folder or on the WinCC flexible installation CD Information on the version of the HMI device image file is displayed in the output area after you have successfully opened the file 9 Only when updating the operating system without reset to factory settings Set Transfer mode on the HMI device If automatic transfer mode is enabled on the HMI device the device automatically sets Transfer mode when an update is initiated 10 In WinCC flexible select Update OS on the configuring PC to run the operating system update 11 Only when updating the operating system with reset to factory settings Switch on the power supply to the HMI device 12 Follow the instructions in WinCC flexible During the operating system update a status view opens to indicate progress A message is displayed when the operating system update is successfully completed The HMI device does no longer cont
88. the evaluation of the signals from the stop or Emergency Stop circuits of the plant Note The exterior of the connection box variants differ only in the printing on the side Note Recovery time Wait for approximately one second after you have removed the connecting cable from the connection box before you plug the connecting cable back in After power failures lasting less than one second the connecting cable has to be disconnected Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO 23 Overview 1 4 Accessories Division of the system into zones You can divide a system into various zones or functional areas by using numerous connection boxes You can also set up the safety functions zone dependently This means that both enabling buttons and STOP buttons can act in only one particular zone and not in others Connection point recognition You can set an individual box ID for each connection box The box ID allows connection points to be recognized Combination of connecting cable and connection box It is ensured by mechanical means that only the following combinations can be connected e Mobile Panel 277 with connecting cable DP on the connection box DP e Mobile Panel 277 with connecting cable PN on the connection box PN 1 4 3 Rechargeable buffer battery The rechargeable buffer battery avoids the need to restart the Mobile Panel when changing between different connection boxes
89. the specified line column 290057 The tags of the recipe specified were toggled from offline to online mode Each change of a tag in this recipe is now immediately downloaded to the PLC 290058 The tags of the specified recipe were toggled from offline to online mode Modifications to tags in this recipe are no longer immediately transferred to the PLC but must be transferred there explicitly by downloading a record 290059 Alarm reporting that the specified record was saved 290060 Alarm reporting that the specified record memory was cleared 290061 Alarm reporting that clearing of record memory was canceled due to an error 290062 The record number is above the maximum of 65536 This record cannot be created Select another number 290063 This occurs with the system function ExportDataRecords when the parameter Overwrite is set to No An attempt has been made to save a recipe under a file name which already exists The export is canceled Check the ExportDataRecords system function 290064 Alarm reporting that the deletion of records has started 290065 Alarm reporting that the deletion of records has successfully completed 290066 Confirmation request before deleting records 290068 Security request to confirm if all records in the recipe should be deleted 290069 Security request to confirm if all records in the recipe
90. the wall holder 5 7 COnMECHOM DOX siaren ee ete te Re eed ee eid 111 5 7 1 STOP button on the Connection box PIUS ccceccsectecnse cece enecneceeeseeeeseessecaseaeeeenaeeasenee 111 5 7 2 STOP button on the Connection box BaSIC cccccccccee cece cceeneene ene ceeeeeeeneesaecascaeeeenaeeseesee 112 5 7 3 Displays on the connection box PN 0 eeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeaeeesenaneeeeees 6 Configuring the Operating system ceccceeeseeeseeeeceeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeaeeesaeeeesaeessaeeseaaeesaeeeeeaeeseaeesenaeaeeeeeeeeeaes 6 1 LORTE ase aise dik E See t vat date oe eebgtcndate naa a cddevvata tetnsshd cans ssdedeevabacevvaa vente dinate Goeee 6 2 Control Panel seirinin ieie iaaeaie iiaia ie aiai 6 2 1 OVETVIEW aciera e a E e a tat wdeustsaedtzacee 118 6 2 2 REISTENCE noon estae a aaa e EAE A SAE E E E EEE 119 6 2 3 Operating the Control Panal sees issisrisissrieiiisernerineiierrervei eus aeerieideori iari ei e ANE EEEE 6 3 Changing settings for OPCration eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeeseeaaeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeseenneeaaes 122 6 3 1 Configuring the Screen KeybOard ee ccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeceaeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeenaeeaaes 6 3 2 Setting the Character Repetition of the Keyboard 6 3 3 Setting the Double click 0 2 ee cece ee eeeee eee eeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeeeeeaeeeseaaeeesecaaeeeeeaaeeeseeaeeeeenaeeaaeeeseeaes 125 6 3 4 Calibrating the TOUCH Sreo essre ae
91. to be imported 2 Operate the operating element with the function Import data record The record is imported from an external data medium as a CSV file and then displayed in the recipe view after import Result The imported recipe data record is saved on the HMI device Deviating structure If the structure of the CSV file differs from the structure of the recipe deviations are handled as follows e Any additional values in the CSV file will be rejected e The system applies the configured default value to the recipe data record if the CSV file contains an insufficient number of values e Ifthe CSV file contains values of the wrong data type the configured default value is set in the recipe data record Example The imported CSV file contains values that were entered as floating point numbers However the corresponding tag expects an integer value In this case the system discards the imported value and uses the configured default Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 252 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Operating recipes 10 10 Examples 10 10 Examples 10 10 1 Entering a recipe data record Introduction You would like to enter production data on the HMI device without interrupting the process in the machine or plant For this reason the production data should not be transferred to the PLC Procedure Proceed as follows 1 2 3 4 Call the recipe view or a recipe screen Select th
92. tool Drill four through holes or four threaded holes M4 NOTICE Permissible torque The connection box housing is made of plastic Do not exceed 0 4 to 0 5 Nm of torque when tightening the screws If the screws are tightened more than 20 times there is risk of damage to the threads 5 Attach the connection box See also Mounting positions and type of fixation Page 47 52 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Installation and connection 4 3 Electrical Installation 4 3 Electrical Installation Electrical connections The electrical installation comprises the components e Mobile Panel 277 e Connection box You can connect the following devices or HMI devices to these components Device Control element Mobile Panel 277 Connection box Configuring PC Yes Yes Printer Yes 1 PLC Yes Supply voltage Yes Connection to Stop circuit Yes Monitoring signal of the STOP button Yes Connection to enable circuit Yes Cable for input bit for connection detection Yes 1 Applies to the connection of a network printer to Mobile Panel 277 via the connection box PN 4 4 Connecting the connection box 4 4 1 Overview Requirements e The connection box is mounted in accordance with the specifications of these operating instructions e Only shielded standard cables may be used NOTICE Permitted length o
93. transfer properties in an active project NOTICE Transfer mode via channel 2 The bus parameters for example address of the HMI device are read out of the project that is currently running on the HMI device You can change the settings for the transfer via channel 2 The following steps are required e Close the project e Change the settings on the HMI device e Then return to Transfer mode The next time the project is started on the HMI device the settings will be overwritten by the values from the project Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 147 Configuring the operating system 6 7 Communication settings See also Changing MPI PROFIBUS DP Settings Page 143 Changing the Network Configuration Page 152 6 7 3 Enabling PROFINET IO PROFINET IO Requirements Procedure 148 If the HMI device is connected to the PLC via PROFINET function keys or buttons for example can be configured as PROFINET IO direct keys If PROFINET IO direct keys are used in the project they must be enabled Note If you enable PROFINET IO direct keys you cannot use the RS 422 RS 485 port for serial communication PROFINET IO direct keys and PROFIBUS DP direct keys are mutually exclusive You have opened the PROFINET dialog with the PROFINET i button PROFINET OK V PROFINET 10 enabled A Device name max 255 characters HMI
94. undertaken by authorized persons The STOP button must be checked periodically for proper functioning Awarnine After a hard impact to the HMI device check the safety relevant features for functional capability for example in the event that the HMI device is dropped Manual actions performed with the HMI device may only occur in conjunction with the enabling buttons and at reduced velocity If the system is operated with the HMI device Ensure that current operation is only possible by means of the HMI device and not from any other point on the system Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO 33 Safety instructions and general notes 2 2 Standards Cetificates and Approvals Proper use Awarnine Commissioning of the HMI device is forbidden until it has been absolutely ensured that the machine in which the HMI device is to be installed complies with Directive 98 37 EC or Directive 2006 42 EC as of 29 December 2009 High frequency radiation NOTICE Unintentional operating situations High frequency radiation for example from cellular phones can lead to undesirable operating situations 2 2 Standards Cetificates and Approvals Certifications CE approval 34 caution The following overview shows possible approvals The only valid approvals for the HMI device and the connection box itself are those shown
95. wall holder Observe the following points when selecting the mounting location e Position the wall holder so that the display of the hooked in HMI device is not exposed to direct sunlight e Position the wall holder so that the HMI device can be ergonomically inserted by the user Choose a suitable mounting height Maintaining clearances The following clearances are required around the wall holder ry 295 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 48 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO Planning application 3 3 Preparing for mounting The following clearances are required around the connection box DP PULL Q 7 Ast Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO 49 Planning application 3 4 Specitications for Insulation Tests Protection Class and Degree of Protection 3 4 Specifications for Insulation Tests Protection Class and Degree of Protection Test voltages Insulation strength is demonstrated in the type test with the following test voltages in accordance with IEC 61131 2 Circuits with a nominal voltage of Ue to other circuits or ground lt 50V Test voltage 500 VDC Protection class Protection Class in accordance with IEC 60536 i e equipotential bonding conductor to profile rail required Protection against foreign objects and water Degree of protection in accordance wit
96. 0 WinCC flexible Runtime is operating in demo Install the authorization mode You have no authorization or your authorization is corrupted 240001 WinCC flexible Runtime is operating in demo Load an adequate authorization powerpack mode Too many tags are configured for the installed version 240002 WinCC flexible Runtime is operating with a time Restore the full authorization limited emergency authorization 240004 Error while reading the emergency authorization Restart WinCC flexible Runtime install the WinCC flexible Runtime is operating in demo authorization or repair the authorization see mode Commissioning Instructions Software Protection 240005 The Automation License Manager has detected an Reboot the HMI device or PC If this does not solve the internal system fault problem remove the Automation License Manager and Possible causes install it again e A corrupt file e A defective installation e No free space for the Automation License Manager etc 250000 S7 Force alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 250000 The tag in the specified line in Status Force is not Check the set address and then verify that the address updated because the address configured for this is set up in the PLC tag is not available 250001 The tag in the specified line in Status Force is not Check the set address updated because the PLC type configured for this tag does not exist Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexi
97. 00001 Coordination is canceled because the write access Change the address or set the address in the PLC at to the address configured in the PLC is not an area which allows write access possible 200002 Coordination is not carried out at the moment Internal error because the address format of the area pointer does not match the internal storage format 200003 Coordination can be executed again because the last error state is eliminated return to normal operation 200004 The coordination may not be executed 200005 No more data is read or written Possible causes Ensure that the cable is plugged in and the PLC is operational Restart the system if the system alarm persists 200100 PLC user version alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 200100 Coordination is not executed because the address Change the address or set up the address in the PLC configured in the PLC does not exist is not set Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 302 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Appendix A 2 System alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 200101 Coordination is canceled because the write access Change the address or set the address in the PLC at to the address configured in the PLC is not an area which allows write access possible 200102 Coordination is not carried out at the moment Internal error because the address format of the area pointer does not match the internal storage format 20
98. 0103 Coordination can be executed again because the last error state is eliminated return to normal operation 200104 The coordination may not be executed 200105 No more data is read or written Possible causes Ensure that the cable is plugged in and the PLC is e The cable is defective e The PLC does not respond is defective etc e System overload 210000 PLC job alarms operational Restart the system if the system alarm persists Number 210000 Effect causes Jobs are not processed because the address configured in the PLC does not exist has not been set up Remedy Change the address or set up the address in the PLC 210001 Jobs are not processed because read write access to the address configured in the PLC is not possible Change the address or set up the address in the PLC in an area which allows read write access 210002 Jobs are not executed because the address format of the area pointer does not match the internal storage format Internal error 210003 The job buffer is processed again because the last error status has been eliminated return to normal operation 210004 It is possible that the job buffer will not be processed 210005 A control request with an illegal number was initiated Check the PLC program 210006 An error occurred while attempting to execute the control request As a result the control request is not executed
99. 10 6 6 Reading a recipe data record from the PLC snssnssssrsrrsinrnsirtnsnstntintnntnnnnnrnntnnnnnnn nnen n nenene 243 10 6 7 Transferring a recipe data record to the PLC 2 10 7 Operating the simple recipe ViCW ceececececceceeceeeeeeeeeceeceeeeesececaeceeeeeeeseceueeeeeeeesetenieeeeeeaaeess 244 MODEM OVCIMIGW asad oaeee a T R E R and cyataigecivias E 244 10 72 Creating a recipe data record siesrisienini ayi ani a ei decanted wetss 246 10 7 3 Editing a recipe data reCOrd smitser eaa aa aan a Ena aE aR ra 247 10 7 4 Deleting a recipe data reCOrd eccecesccssee sects cteceeneenecesecseeeeseesesacsascasesaeseesseeaeeeeneescaaeesaenes 248 10 7 5 Reading a recipe data record from the PLC ee ecccccccesecceeseenecneceeeeeeeesesaeeeseeeeecnaeeasenees 249 10 7 6 Transferring a recipe data record to the PLC 2 10 8 Exporting a recipe data recordas eaaa a aaia aa aiad aa Eaa aa aa NEEE 251 10 9 Importing a recipe data records ornearren aa aiaa a eaaa aaia ai 252 10 10 EXampleS isrtri enina aie a aaa aaaea leecentWlenseelstiesentancldeideesdiderecdes 253 10 10 1 Entering a recipe data reCord cccccccccseccseenecnecseeeenecesecsaeeeecesesecsescaseaaesecsaseaseseeeeesiasenaenes 253 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0AB0 13 Table of contents 10 10 2 Manual production sequence 11 Maintenance and Care cieici cciiccccesseccdiasesteecescceceea eenean arinaa
100. 1DL01 0ABO 329 Glossary Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 330 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Index A Accessory kit 20 Acknowledge Alarm Error alarm Activate Password protection 128 Address assignment TCP IP network 152 Addressing W Acknowledge Alarm e ag Display 223 Editing 227 Functional scope Alarm buffer Functional scope Alarm window 225 ALARM_S b7 Alphanumerical Screen keyboard 197 Alphanumerical value Changing 197 Entering Ambient conditions Climatic connection box Mechanical 45 Mobile panel 4 Tested for 46 Applications Mobile Panel 277 Authorization Automatic Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO Transfer 170 Automation License Manager B Backing up 167 174 175 177 213 Registry Information 119 Temporary files 132 To memory card 119 With ProSave With WinCC flexible Backlighting Reducing Setting 172 Backup time Internal clock 265 266 Bar Basic knowledge Brightness Changing 134 Browser Home page Setting Bus connection 30 Bus parameters Profile Byte assignment Direct keys 92 C Cable Connecting 69 Cable cross section Calibrating Touch screen 126 Care 255 CE approval 34 Certificate Delete Delete Eo E LED 1 331 Index Certificates Certifications 34 Changing Brightness 134 Monitor setting 13
101. 24 V Terminal strip 2 12 pin STOP13 STOP14 STOP23 24V 24V STOP24 CTRL31 2 elf L_____ CTRL32 PRESENT31 K4 K1 PRESENT32 Mobile Panel 277 connected power supply switched on and Emergency Stop inactive Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 278 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Technical specifications 12 6 Port assignment on the connection box DP and connection box PN STOP1 STOP2 Mobile panel PRESENT PRESENT Connecting cables 24 V Terminal strip 2 12 pin STOP13 K2 L____ STOP14 STOP23 24V 24V K3 L____ sTop24 CTRL31 K2 K3 CTRL32 PRESENT31 K4 K1 PRESENT32 Mobile Panel 277 connected power supply switched on and Emergency Stop active Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 279 Technical specifications 12 6 Port assignment on the connection box DP and connection box PN STOP1 STOP2 Mobile panel PRESENT PRESENT Connecting cables 24 V Terminal strip 2 12 pin STOP13 K2 L o STOP14 STOP23 24V 24V K3 L____ STOP24 CTRL31 K2 K3 CTRL32 PRESENT31 K4 K1 L____ PRESENT32 Power supply switched off Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 280 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Technical specifications 12 6 Port assignment on the connection box DP and connection box PN Connection box Basic wiring examples In contrast to the c
102. 260024 The password you entered does not meet the Enter a password that contains at least one character necessary security guidelines Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO 307 Appendix A 2 System alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 260025 The password you entered does not meet the Enter a password that contains at least one special necessary security guidelines character 260028 Upon system start up an attempt to log on or Check the connection to the SIMATIC Logon Server when trying to change the password of a SIMATIC and its configuration for example log on user the system attempts to access the 4 Port number SIMATIC Logon Server 2 IP address If attempting to log on the new user is not logged 38 in If a different user was logged on before then Rect aga this user is logged off 4 Functional transfer cable Or use a local user 260029 The SIMATIC Logon user is not associated to any Check the user data on the SIMATIC Logon Server or several groups and the configuration in your WinCC flexible project A The new user is not logged in If a different user user may only be assigned to one group was logged on before then this user is logged off 260030 The SIMATIC Logon user could not change his Log in again and choose a different password Check password on the SIMATIC Logon Server The new the password rules on the S
103. 265 26 Internet Home page Options Search engine Security settings 119 Service 7 Settings 1 Support Internet Explorer Internet options Privacy IP address Ethernet Setting IP65 degree of protection Safety instruction a K Keyboard Safety instruction 80 Keyboard sroperics i 119 123 Key operated switch Application Bit assignment Operating L Labeling Function keys 106 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO Labeling strips Attaching Dimensions Exchange Printing 106 LAN connection Language change Functional scope Layout Slider control 2 Sm rtClient view Trend view LED Connection box PN HMI device information Memory information System information 140 LED function ke Application o5 Bit aA License key 185 Transferring 168 186 Transferring back 168 187 Limit value For password For user For user view 213 Limit value a Functional Ta op Limit value test 195 Loader Buttons 115 Open 116 Log Functional scope 28 Logoff Users Logoff time Logon User 215 Logon data M Maintenance 255 Manual Production sequence Transfer Mechanical Storage conditions Transport conditions 335 Index Memory Specifications 266 Technical data 265 Memory card Backup to Inserting Restoring file system 132 Restoring from Unplug Memory informati
104. 35 V 500 ms Time between two transients minimum 50s Power consumption connection box PN without Mobile Panel e Typical e Constant current maximum e Power on current surge It e Approx 100 mA e Approx 150 mA e Approx 0 5 As Power consumption connection box PN with Mobile Panel e Typical e Constant current maximum e Power on current surge It e Approx 600 mA e Approx 750 mA e Approx 0 6 A2s Enabling button e Connection voltage e Amperage max Amperage min e 24VDC e 400 mA e 10mA Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Technical specifications 12 3 Mobile Panel 277 port assignments STOP button optional e Connection voltage e 24VDC e Amperage max e 500 mA e Amperage min e 10mA Fuse internal Electronic Current load PLC accompanying signals Max 100 mA Recovery time After 1s Note Recovery time Wait for approximately one second after you have removed the connecting cable from the connection box before you plug the connecting cable back into the connection box Power failure It is necessary to remove and replace the connection cable in the event of power failures lasting less than a second in order to eliminate possible malfunctions 12 3 Mobile Panel 277 port assignments 12 3 1 RS 485 IF 2 Sub D socket 9 pin with screw lock RS 485 port pin assignment Pin Ass
105. 4 User data 2 Character repeat 119 Screen keyboard Setting Charge level LED Charging Electrostatic 285 Circuit diagram 89 Clearance Connection box 48 Wall holder Climatic Storage conditions Transport conditions Closing Project Column sequence Alarm view Combination Connecting cable connection box 16 Compatibility conflict Compress Program memory S5 Configuration diagram Configuring PC 64 74 MPI PROFIBUS DP 64 PLC PLC on connection box DP 61 PLC on connection box PN 63 Printer Configuration phase Configure Network Configuring Operating system Screen keyboard 119 122 Configuring PC Configuration diagram 64 Connecting 64 74 Connectin Cable Configuring PC 64 Connecting cables Connection box 54 Connection ae 59 Connection box DP a Equipotential bonding 332 PLC 61 64 Printer 66 Connecting cable DP Post connector RJ45 plug connector 270 Connecting cable PN Post connector 272 RJ45 plug connector Connecting cables Connecting Connection box Box ID 318 Clearance 48 Combination with connecting cable Connecting 54 Connection point recognition 24 EMC compliant installation 41 Mounting position Open Recovery time Rotary encoder switch 56 Safety instruction 54 84 101 Variants 2 Connection box Basic Switching states Emergency Stop circuit 113 Switching states Stop circuit 113 Wiring examples Connection box DP DIL sw
106. 5 Inscribe the labeling strips in accordance with the plant Wait for the printed labeling strips to dry before you insert them 6 Push the labeling strips into the guides 7 Screw both cover caps back on Screwed on cover caps with inserted rubber seals satisfy protection class IP65 8 Place the sticker on to the cover caps Procedure for exchanging labeling strips Should the exchange of labeling strips become necessary these can be reordered See also Accessory kit for Mobile Panel 277 8 Page 20 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 108 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Operator controls and displays 5 6 Holding the Mobile Panel and attaching it to the wall holder 5 6 Holding the Mobile Panel and attaching it to the wall holder Holding the mobile panel The following figure shows the forearm position for left and right hand operation using Mobile Panel 277 10 as an example WK Ve HA A a i l E The depicted postures provide sufficient freedom of movement while servicing the monitored system The depicted forearm holding method enables both right and left handed persons to use the HMI device with equal ease The free hand can be used to operate the control elements on the front side The hand holding the HMI device can also be used to activate the enabling button The acknowledgment of the control input is also given if you only press one of the enabling buttons The enabling
107. 64 ss Changing Password Protection Page 128 Changing the Printer Properties Page 136 Enabling PROFINET IO Page 148 Changing Regional Settings e Number format e Currency e Time format e Date format SC on Changing MPI PROFIBUS DP Settings Page 143 va Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO 119 Configuring the operating system 6 2 Control Panel Icon Function Setting the screen saver Page 135 Displaying System Properties Page 140 Setting the device name of the HMI device Page 151 Configuring the data channel Page 145 tae Setting the Delay Time Page 141 ba Changing E Mail Settings Page 154 The WinCC flexible Internet Settings tab can contain additional tabs This depends on the options that have been enabled for network operation in the project 6 2 3 Operating the Control Panel Introduction Procedure 120 The Control Panel is operated with the HMI device touch screen Proceed as follows to change settings in the Control Panel 1 oa A O N Close the project Use the provided operating element The Loader appears Open the Control Panel by pressing the Control Panel button To open the required dialog double click its symbol Change as required by touching the tab Now make the necessary changes Touch the respe
108. 6691 1DL01 OABO Preface Basic knowledge required General knowledge of automation technology and process communication is needed to understand the operating instructions It is also assumed that those using the manual have experience in using personal computers and knowledge of Microsoft operating systems Scope of the operating instructions The operating instructions apply to the following HMI devices in conjunction with the software package WinCC flexible e Mobile Panel 277 8 e Mobile Panel 277 10 Position in the information landscape These operating instructions form part of the SIMATIC HMI documentation The following information provides you with an overview of the SIMATIC HMI information landscape User manuals e WinCC flexible Micro Describes basic principles of configuration using the WinCC flexible Micro Engineering System e WinCC flexible Compact Standard Advanced Describes basic principles of configuration using the WinCC flexible Compact Engineering System WinCC flexible Standard WinCC flexible Advanced e WinCC flexible Runtime Describes how to commission and operate your runtime project on a PC e WinCC flexible Migration Describes how to convert an existing ProTool project to WinCC flexible Describes how to convert an existing WinCC project to WinCC flexible Describes how to convert an existing ProTool project including a change of the HMI device for example from OP3 to OP 73 or from OP7 to
109. 7 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0AB0 Technical specifications 12 6 Port assignment on the connection box DP and connection box PN Signal Mobile panel connected on a SIMATIC S7 Mobile panel on the connection box Signal at the digital input of a SIMATIC S7 Not connected o Connected q Note Output Mobile panel connected The output Mobile panel connected on the connection box Basic is associated with the power supply On the connection box Plus this output is managed on a dual pole relay Observe the following points when connecting the Mobile panel connected signal e Connect terminal strip 2 pin 7 of the connection box to the digital input of the PLC e Connection box Basic Terminal strip 2 pin 8 of the connection box remains free e Connection box Plus Terminal strip 2 pin 8 must be fed with 24 V Connection box Plus wiring examples Terminal strip 2 12 pin STOP13 2 STOP14 STOP23 24 V 24V K3 STOP24 CTRL31 2 a e e K3 L o CTRL32 PRESENT31 K4 K1 L o PRESENT32 an ig en Mobile Panel 277 not connected and power supply switched on Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 277 Technical specifications 12 6 Port assignment on the connection box DP and connection box PN STOP1 STOP2 Mobile panel PRESENT PRESENT Connecting cables
110. 7 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 81 Operator controls and displays 5 2 Operator controls of Mobile Panel 277 8 5 2 Operator controls of Mobile Panel 277 8 5 2 1 STOP button 5 2 1 1 Overview Introduction 82 The STOP button is an optional operator control for Mobile Panel 277 8 The STOP button is designed with two circuits and allows a safety related stop of the system being monitored The STOP button meets safety category 3 in accordance with EN 954 1 when used in combination with an external monitoring device Please refer to the safety information and general instructions chapters for further safety instructions When you unplug the Mobile Panel 277 from the connection box the Stop circuit is either opened or automatically bridged This is dependent on the type of connection box used Possible application areas for the STOP button e The STOP button can be used to initiate a process cycle specific rapid stop of a monitored system plant machine or machine zone The Stop operation can occur with or without a power shutdown Advantages Limits the range of effectiveness Fast restart No loss of machine coordinates and thus no recalibration upon restart Preservation of tool and workpiece Triggering of the Emergency Stop function of a monitored system by means of looping in the Emergency Stop circuit Advantage Simple integration in an existing Em
111. 8 Users Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO Design Connecting cables 21 Design variations Device name For network operation 151 DHCP 152 104 192 Direct key 91 Bit coding 9 Byte assignment 9 2E Functional scope 29 Reaction time zE Display Alarm 223 Infotext 199 Specifications Technical data Display format DNS 152 Server 150 Documentation Conventions Enclosed 5 Getting Started Bl Operating instructions 5 User manual 4 Double click Setting 125 Drop down list box E EC Declaration of Conformity 34 Editing Alarm 2 apn EN record 240 247 Electrical Installation Electrical potential difference 59 Electrostatic charging 2 Electrostatic discharge Precautions 286 Element list 235 246 E Mail a 120 155 EMC 41 Gudetine b 34 Emission Enabling button 38 88 10 Circuit diagram 8 89 had Danger arising from improper use 39 Operating 333 Index Panic activation Switch settings Enabling device 3 Encryption Enhanced recipe view Entering Alphanumerical value By means of function key Date Numerical value Recipe data record 253 Symbolic value Text box Time Via HMI objects 189 Equipotential bonding Cable 59 Connecting Connection gra hic 60 Requirements 59 Error alarm Acknowledge ESD Abbreviations Labeling 2 Safety instruction 54 Ethernet setting
112. 8 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Operating alarms 9 1 Overview Alarms Alarms indicate events and states on the HMI device which have occurred in the system in the process or on the HMI device itself A status is reported when it is received An alarm could trigger one of the following alarm events Incoming Outgoing Acknowledge The configuration engineer defines which alarms must be acknowledged by the user An alarm may contain the following information Alarm classes Date Time Alarm text Location of fault State Alarm class Alarm number Alarm group Diagnostics capability Alarms are assigned to various alarm classes Error Alarms in this class must always be acknowledged Error alarms normally indicate critical errors within the plant such as Motor temperature too high Operation Warning alarms usually indicate states of a plant such as Motor switched on System System alarms indicate states or events which occur on the HMI device Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 221 Operating alarms 9 1 Overview Alarm groups Alarm buffer Alarm report Alarm log 222 e SIMATIC diagnostic alarms SIMATIC diagnostic alarms show states and events of the SIMATIC S7 or SIMOTION PLCs e User specific alarm classes The properties of this alarm class must be defined in the configuration Please refer to your system documentation to check whether additiona
113. A Siemens AG tested and released PC PPI cable should be used to convert from RS 232 to RS 485 See chapter PC PPI cable Page 26 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO nstallation and connection 4 5 Connecting Mobile Panel 277 USB connection Observe the following information when connecting a USB device NOTICE Adhere to the USB connection sequence You will not be able to transfer a project to the HMI device if you do not adhere to the connection sequence Observe the following sequence when connecting by USB 1 HMI device 2 PC USB Host to Host cable You will not be able to transfer a project to the HMI device if you use driver for the USB host to host cable Use only the driver that is included with WinCC flexible for the USB host to host cable Note A USB PPI patch cable V 5 or higher is required for operation at higher bit rates The version code is printed on the cable e g E stand 5 corresponds to version 5 4 5 5 Connecting the Connecting Cable Introduction The connection cable can be connected to the connection box with the help of a connector metallic push pull circular connector The connector is coded to prevent faulty insertion Ep a na Positioning mark Outer sleeve Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0AB0O 75 Installation and connection 4 5 Connecting Mobil
114. AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 323 Abbreviations RAM Random Access Memory PELV Protective Extra Low Voltage RJ45 Registered Jack Type 45 RTS Request to send RxD Receive Data SD Card Security Digital Card SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage SP Service Pack PLC Programmable Logic Controller STN Super Twisted Nematic Sub D Subminiature D plug TAB Tabulator TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TFT Thin Film Transistor TTY Teletype TxD Transmit Data UL Underwriter s Laboratory USB Universal Serial Bus WINS Windows Internet Naming Service Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 324 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Glossary Acknowledge Acknowledgment of an alarm confirms that it has been noted Alarm logging Output of user specific alarms to a printer in parallel to their output to the HMI device screen Alarm acknowledging Acknowledgment of an alarm confirms that it has been noted Alarm activated Moment at which an alarm is triggered by the PLC or HMI device Alarm deactivated Moment at which the initiation of an alarm is reset by the PLC Alarm user specific A user specific alarm designates a certain operating status of the plant connected to the HMI device via the PLC Automation device PLC of the SIMATIC S5 series such as the S5 115U Automation system Controller of the SIMATIC S7 series such as a SIMATIC S7 300 Bootloader Used to start the operating system Automati
115. An attempt was made to save a record under a The following remedies are available record number which already exists e Check the source for the number constant or tag The action is not executed value e First delete the record e Change the Overwrite function parameter 290014 The file specified to be imported could not be Check found e The file name e Ensure that the file is in the specified directory 290020 Alarm reporting that the download of records from the HMI device to the PLC has started 290021 Alarm reporting that the download of records from the HMI device to the PLC was completed 290022 Alarm reporting that the download of records from Check in the configuration whether erron e The recipe number exists e The record number exist e The Overwrite function parameter is set 290023 Alarm reporting that the download of records from the PLC to the HMI device has started Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO 311 Appendix A 2 System alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 290024 Alarm reporting that the download of records from the PLC to the HMI device was completed 290025 Alarm reporting that the download of records from Check in the configuration whether the PLC to the HMI device was canceled due to an e The tag addresses are configured in the PLC STOF e The recipe
116. B host conforms to USB standard 1 1 supporting low speed and full speed USB devices e Maximum load 500 mA 1xRS 45 For Ethernet 1 x plug in terminal strips 12 pin For Ethernet Supply voltage Supply voltage Via connection box Additional specifications Fall height Max 1m Buffer time with internal clock e Without rechargeable battery e With rechargeable battery Approx 3 days Approx 6 months 266 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Technical specifications 12 2 Specifications 12 2 3 Rechargeable buffer battery The following technical specifications are in effect for all new batteries The batteries are delivered uncharged Type Lithium ion accumulator Bridging time 10 min Charging cycles 500 Charging time Approx 5 h Number of changes between connection boxes With fully charged battery 5 changes With empty battery after a charging time of 1h 2 changes Please note that a battery is subject to a natural self discharge The self discharge can lead to a complete discharge over long periods of disuse 12 2 4 Connection box DP Weight Weight without packing Approx 500 g Supply voltage Nominal voltage 24 VDC Range permissible 20 4 to 28 8 V 15 20 Transients maximum permissible 35 V 500 ms Time between two transients minimum 50s Pow
117. BO Operating a project 8 1 Overview Configuration and process control phase HMI devices can be used to operate and monitor tasks in process and production automation The plant screens on the HMI devices are used to provide a clear overview of the active processes The HMI device project which includes the plant screens is created during the configuration phase The configuration engineer defines which tasks the HMI device has in the process and defines the following in detail e Which process data is displayed on the individual HMI device e Which plant components are controlled by this HMI device The configuration engineer stores this information in the project s screens The project is transferred to the HMI device during commissioning After transfer to the HMI device current processes can be operated and monitored in the project s screens The screens enable you to observe for example operational states current process data and faults in a plant Operator controls which are used to operate the process for example buttons I O fields and alarm windows are displayed in the screens Operator control options e Touch screen The HMI device is operated by means of the touch screen The operator controls shown in the dialogs are touch sensitive Touch objects are basically operated in the same way as mechanical keys You activate operator controls by touching them with your finger To double click them touch an operator c
118. Button for calibrating the touch screen Proceed as follows 1 Touch the Recalibrate button to open the following dialog Carefully press and briefly hold stylus on the center of the target Repeat as the target moves around the screen T Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0AB0O Contiguring the operating system 6 3 Changing settings for operation 2 Briefly touch the middle of the calibration crosshairs The calibration crosshairs is then displayed at four more positions Touch the middle of the calibration crosshairs for each position If you do not touch the middle of the calibration crosshairs the procedure is repeated Once you have touched the calibration crosshairs for all positions the following dialog appears New calibration settings have been measured Tape the screen to register saved data Wait for 30 seconds to cancel saved data and keep the current setting Time limit 30 sec 3 Touch the screen within 30 seconds The new calibration is saved If you wait longer than 30 seconds the new calibration is discarded and the original calibration remains in effect The OP Properties dialog Touch tab is displayed again 4 Close the dialog Result The HMI device touch screen is now recalibrated Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 127 Configuring the operating system 6 4 Cha
119. C 140019 SIMOTION Scout is downloading a new projectto Wait until the end of the reconfiguration the PLC Connection to the PLC is canceled 140020 The version in the PLC and that of the project The following remedies are available FWX file do not match Download the current version to the PLC using Connection to the PLC is canceled SIMOTION Scout Regenerate the project using WinCC flexible ES close WinCC flexible Runtime and restart with a new configuration Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 298 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Appendix A 2 System alarms 150000 Connection alarms chnAS511 Connection Number Effect causes Remedy 150000 No more data is read or written Possible causes Ensure that the cable is plugged in the PLC is e The cable is defective operational the correct port is being used e The PLC does not respond is defective etc Restart the system if the system alarm persists e The wrong port is used for the connection e System overload 150001 Connection is up because the cause of the interruption has been eliminated 160000 Connection alarms IVar WinLC OPC Connection Number Effect causes Remedy 160000 No more data is read or written Possible causes Ensure that the cable is plugged in the PLC is e The cable is defective operational the correct port is being used e The PLC does not respond is defective etc Restart the
120. C flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0AB0 231 Operating recipes 10 3 Recipes in the project 10 3 Recipes in the project Overview 232 If recipes are used in a project the following components interact e Recipe view recipe screen On the HMI device recipes are displayed and edited in the recipe view or in a recipe screen The recipe data records from the internal memory of the HMI device are displayed and edited in the recipe view The values of the recipe tags are displayed and edited in the recipe screen Depending on the configuration the values displayed in the recipe view are synchronized with the values of recipe tags HMI device recipe memory Recipes are saved in the form of data records in the HMI device recipe memory The recipe data can also be saved in recipe tags Recipe tags The recipe tags contain recipe data When you edit recipes in a recipe screen the recipe values are stored in recipe tags Depending on the configuration the values of the recipe tags are exchanged with the PLC The recipe tags can be synchronized with the recipe data records so that the same values are saved in both Memory card The memory card is an external storage medium for recipe data records The recipe data records are exported from the HMI device recipe memory and are saved on the memory card in a csv file The records can be reimported from the memory card to the recipe memory
121. C flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 227 Operating alarms 9 6 Edit alarm Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 228 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Operating recipes 1 10 1 Overview Introduction Recipes are used when different variants of a product are manufactured with the same process In this case the product variants differ in terms of their type and quantity of the components but not in terms of the manufacturing process sequence The configuration engineer can store the combination of each individual product variant in a recipe Field of application Recipes can be used everywhere the same product components are used in variable combinations to create different product variants Examples e Beverage industry e Food processing industry e Pharmaceutical industry e Paint industry e Building materials industry e Steel industry Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 229 Operating recipes 10 2 Structure of a recipe 10 2 Structure of a recipe Recipes The recipe collection for the production of a product family can be compared to a file cabinet A recipe which is used to manufacture a product corresponds to a drawer in a file cabinet Example In a plant for producing fruit juice recipes are required for different flavors There is a recipe for example for the flavors orange grape apple and cherry
122. DP Port designation PROFINET ports Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 71 nstallation and connection 4 5 Connecting Mobile Panel 277 The following figure shows the available ports on the Mobile Panel 277 y RJ45 socket for the connecting cable DP Post connector 10 pole for the connecting cable DP RS 485 port IF 2 Slot for a memory card Connection for the rechargeable battery Post connector 12 pole for the connecting cable PN RJ45 socket for connection cable PN USB socket CAUTION RJ45 socket Only use the RJ45 socket for the connection box s connecting cable Please note when connecting that the functional efficiency of the Mobile Panel 277 is only ensured by means of the connecting cable s RJ45 socket Note the warning signs in the opened Mobile Panel 277 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 72 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Installation and connection USB socket 4 5 Connecting Mobile Panel 277 The USB socket is depicted as a sealing plug You can deploy the USB socket in either of the two cable inlets oO USB socket Cap Cable inlet CAUTION Degree of protection Degree of protection IP65 is only ensured if the cap on the USB socket is plugged and sealed tight Connection sequence Connect the connecting cable s connector in the following s
123. Emergency Stop circuit remains closed Is not connected Not available The Stop or Emergency Stop circuit remains closed A WARNING Disconnecting the Mobile Panel 277 If you disconnect the Mobile Panel 277 from the connection box Plus the Stop or Emergency Stop circuit is closed and the Stop status of the system being monitored will be nullified This is independent of whether the STOP button was pressed on the Mobile Panel 277 or not NOTICE Approximately 100 ms elapse between the time the STOP button is pressed and response of the Stop contacts at the connection box Plus STOP button on the connection box Basic The Stop loop through function is not implemented on the connection box Basic Relays such as on the connection box Plus are therefore not required OOOO00 mOOooo0o MOOO00 MOOO0O OOO0O00 MOOOOG ee Li i Connection box DP Connection box PN Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0AB0 Operator controls and displays 5 7 Connection box caution If the Mobile Panel 277 is connected the Stop or Emergency Stop circuit is controlled via the STOP button If you unplug the Mobile Panel 277 s connecting cable from the connection box Basic the following occurs e The Stop or Emergency Stop circuit will be interrupted e A safe machine stop or Emergency Stop of the system being monitored will be ca
124. HMI device and a password 2 The current screen of the project running on the remote device is displayed on the screen of your HMI device 3 You can now monitor or control this screen depending on your configuration Scroll bars are displayed if the screen of the remote HMI device is larger than that of the current HMI device Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 210 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Operating a project 8 11 Operating the Sm rtClient view Procedure for forcing permission If several HMI devices have access to a HMI device only one HMI device has operating permission at any one time Two cases must be distinguished for this case e f another HMI device is already controlling the remote HMI device if configured accordingly you can force operating permission for the remote HMI device You are trying to operate the remote HMI device A dialog appears in which you are prompted to enter the appropriate password for forcing remote control You are now authorized to operate the remote HMI device e f another HMI device is accessing your HMI device via the Sm rtClient view you can force local operating permission for your HMI device Touch the screen of your HMI device five times consecutively You are given permission to operate your local HMI device Procedure for ending remote control You can end monitoring and control of a remote HMI device with one of the following
125. IF1 RS 232 and RS 422 485 may only be connected alternatively IF1 is located on terminal strip 1 of the connection box DP Use only the cables approved for that purpose to connect to a SIMATIC S7 PLC Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0AB0O 61 Installation and connection 4 4 Connecting the connection box Configure the port IF1 on the connection box DP The IF1 port can be configured using the DIL switch The figure below shows the position of the DIL switch DIL switch Note Note the diagrams of the DIL switch settings on the inside of the cover The following table shows the settings of the DIL switch The transmitting and receiving direction is switched internally with the RTS signal Communication Switch setting Meaning RS 485 1234 Connection box not last node in the data ON network terminal resistance not activated EENE Corresponds to default setting RS 485 1234 Connection box last node in the data network HE ON terminal resistance activated IL RS 232 RS 422 1234 For third party PLCs EEEE ON Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 62 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0AB0 Installation and connection 4 4 Connecting the connection box Configuration diagram Connecting a PLC to a connection box PN The figure below shows how to connect the PLC to the connection box DP PN and to a Mobil
126. IMATIC Logon Server password may not comply with the password regulations on the server or the user does not have the right to change his password The old password remains and the user is logged off 260031 It was not possible to log the user on to the Try again If necessary check the password data on SIMATIC Logon Server The user name or the the SIMATIC Logon Server password could be incorrect or the user does not have sufficient rights to log on The new user is not logged in If a different user was logged on before then this user is logged off 260032 It was not possible to log the user on to the Check the user data on the SIMATIC Logon Server SIMATIC Logon Server as his account is blocked The new user is not logged in If a different user was logged on before then this user is logged off 260033 The action change password or log on user could Check the connection to the SIMATIC Logon Server not be carried out and its configuration for example 1 Port number 2 IP address 3 Server name 4 Functional transfer cable Or use a local user 260034 The last logon operation has not yet ended A user Wait until the logon operation is complete action or a logon dialog can therefore not be called The logon dialog is not opened The user action is not executed 260035 The last attempt to change the password was not Wait until the procedure is complete completed A user action or a logon dialog can therefore not be called
127. IiNIa aIAa A JV NJj gt oO Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 271 Technical specifications 12 4 Port assignment on the connection box DP 12 3 6 Post connector for connecting cable PN Post connector 12 pin 12 2 DOAN IREE 11 1 Pin assignment of the post connector for the connecting cable PN a 5 Assignment Circuit 24 VDC Power supply GND 24 V Stop 23 Stop circuit Stop 24 Stop 13 Stop 14 Enable 1 Enable circuit Enable 1 9 Enable 2 10 Enable 2 11 ICD Box ID 12 ICD INIo JAajJA JV INJ gt 12 4 Port assignment on the connection box DP Location of the ports Terminal strip 1 Fast connector Terminal strip 2 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 272 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Technical specifications 12 4 Port assignment on the connection box DP CAUTION When connecting the cables to the terminal strips ensure that the assignments for terminal strips 1 and 2 are not reversed Terminal strip 1 12 pin IF1 and the power supply are connected to the terminal strip The terminal strip has a mechanical coding in order to prevent mix up with terminal strip 2 Assignment of terminal strip 1 Pin RS 232 RS 232 RS 422 RS 485 Power supply IF 1A IF 1A IF 1B IF 1B 9 pin 15 pin 9 pin 9 pin post socket socket socket 1 CTS 8 CTS 5 n C n C n C 2 RTS 7 RTS 10 n C n C
128. N All specifications in mm Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 263 Technical specifications 12 2 Specifications 12 2 Specifications 12 2 1 Mobile Panel 277 8 HMI device Weight without packing Approx 1 7 kg max 1 8 kg Display Type Color TFT LC Display Display area active 151 66 mm x 113 74 mm 7 5 Resolution 640 x 480 pixels Colors displayable 64k colors Brightness control Yes Back lighting CCFL Half Brightness Life Time typical 50 000 h Input unit Type Touch screen analog resistive Membrane keyboard Function keys 18 with LEDs Enabling button 2 circuit 3 level Connection voltage 24 VDC amperage max 400 mA Amperage min 10 mA STOP button optional 2 circuit Connection voltage 24 VDC Amperage max 500 mA Amperage min 10 mA These are normally closed contacts Handwheel optional 1 50 pulses per rotation Key operated switch optional 1 3 switch settings Illuminated pushbutton optional 2 LED separately controllable Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 264 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Technical specifications 12 2 Specifications Memory Application memory 6 MB Ports 1x RS 485 Max 12 Mbit s 1 x USB e USB host conforms to USB standard 1 1 supporting
129. NEn a eoa aaa ee anenai Enone aa Naaa SENKA 11 1 Maintenance and Care scs cciccctecesledec iets lenitideseetianiedecedlcceeealdl stitet ecsuelesennidadesvladecvaladceescesvinane 11 2 Spare Parts and REPalrSi isieecteccatelesd ne cakes elude dena de lacies hans aeel E a E E E AA A EEE 12 Technical Specifications issii ua e a e a aaa e e a E aiea Kaa 12 1 DIMENSION drawings sses easa aE T EA ed cecsaends 257 24 1 Mobile Panel 277 8 isisncnnnirnnunn dd aaa nid aii iene ences 257 12 12 Mobile Panel 277 VO penisami ai a aaa a aa aiaa ada rebel 259 1214 37 Wall holder 230 cccecsnaet eiacecd sce tacesnsdesssduehduceenedadaesstdaeadvebsuleszaed deedsdeinss sidsaccusbdatdesessbdulaseareedeettoes 261 12 1 4 Connection DOX DP isspesad ee ences eaeenecnsecsecseseasesececsaseseesecaeiecseceeenseniecaeeeeenaeeaee 262 12S CONMECUON DOX PN osisssa eiiie a as E fetes si ad TA als Seve les Deed dec eee dst 263 12 2 SPOCIIGAUIOIS seai a A pa Gants e TE pE E E A E E E EE E 264 12 2 1_ Mobile Panel 277 8 sctancsiande cotilisdin nieve aia aaa aia can ene 264 122 2 Mobile Panel 277 WO miridan tiki tle ated a E EA a a E esd eee deta 265 12 2 3 Rechargeable buffer battery sirsrnersiiigeisni niania aaien aeaea aiae 267 1224 Connection DO DP ives cecycde sci eveeiey comedies Milas pa E E E 267 1249 Connection DOr PN sesaosan nna E A EAE a O E 2 12 3 Mobile Panel 277 port ASSIQNMENTS cccccccectecceeeeeeteeneeeeceeeecaeaecseenectsensecseeeeeeeceeeeee 269
130. OP 77B Describes how to convert an existing ProTool project including a change from a graphics device to a Windows CE device e Communication Communication Part 1 describes the connection of the HMI device to SIMATIC PLCs Communication Part 2 describes the connection of the HMI device to third party PLCs Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Preface Operating instructions Operating instructions for SIMATIC HMI devices OP 73 OP 77A OP 77B TP 170micro TP 170A TP 170B OP 170B OP 73micro TP 177micro TP 177A TP 177B OP 177B TP 270 OP 270 TP 277 OP 277 MP 177 MP 270B MP 277 MP 370 MP 377 Operating instructions for mobile SIMATIC HMI devices Mobile Panel 177 Mobile Panel 277 Operating instructions compact for SIMATIC HMI devices OP77B Mobile Panel 177 Mobile Panel 277 Operating instructions for SIMATIC accessories Industrial USB Hub 4 Getting Started WinCC flexible for first time users Based on an example project this is a step by step introduction to the basics of configuring screens alarms recipes and screen navigation WinCC flexible for power users Based on an example project this is a step by step introduction to the basics of configuring logs project reports scripts user management multilingual projects and integration in STEP 7 WinCC flexible options Based on an
131. Overview 7 2 Design of the HMI device 1 2 Design of the HMI device 1 2 1 Overview The following figure shows the Mobile Panel 277 8 connected to a connection box DP Combinations Mobile Panel 277 8 Connection box DP Connecting cable DP Cable for power supply and safety functions Cable for process connection You can connect the Mobile Panel 277 to PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET The following table shows which connection box and which connecting cable can be combined Only the combinations listed in the table are possible Data network PROFIBUS DP Connection box Connection box DP Basic Connection box DP Plus Connecting cables Connecting cable DP PROFINET Connection box PN Basic Connection box PN Plus Connecting cable PN 16 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 O0ABO Overview 1 2 Design of the HMI device The connecting cable contains the lines for the process connection the safety functions and the power supply The connecting cable is available in different lengths on separate order Carry out the cabling for the power supply and safety functions plant specifically The Mobile Panel 277 can be securely stored in its wall holder 1 2 2 Structure of Mobile Panel 277 8 Delivery includes the HMI device and an accessory kit The Mobile Panel 277 is available in three design variations e With enabling button
132. P or manual address assignment 3 If you assign the address manually enter the respective addresses in the text boxes for IP Address Subnet Mask and if used Default Gateway 4 Ifa name server is used in the network change to the Name Servers tab SMC LAN91C111 Ethernet Settings IP Address Name Servers Name server addresses may be Primary DNS fe eT automatically assigned if DHCP is enabled on this adapter Secondary DNS fine o o You can specify additional WINS or DNS resolvers in the Sah RSE E space provided secondary wins 5 Enter the respective addresses in the text boxes Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 152 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Contiguring the operating system 6 8 Configuring network operation 6 Confirm your entries The dialog closes 7 Close the Network amp Dial Up Connections view The Control Panel is displayed again Result The LAN connection parameters for the HMI device have been changed See also Overview of network operation Page 149 6 8 4 Changing the Logon Data Introduction Windows CE uses this information to gain access to the network resources Enter the user name password and domain you have received from your administrator Requirements You have opened the Network ID dialog box by pressing the Network ID ss icon Identification Windows CE uses this User name informatio
133. SIEMENS SIMATIC HMI HMI device Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions Order No 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO 08 2008 A5E00355986 02 Preface lt s ES Safety instructions and general notes N Planning application i Installation and connection Operator controls and O1 Q m ro ie D Configuring the operating Commissioning a project Operating a project 2 a 3 0 0 N O Operating alarms 5 O Operating recipes Maintenance and care Technical specifications Abbreviations gt ko fo Q S s ZEN UJ gt N Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety as well as to prevent damage to property The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken A WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken CAUTION with a safety alert symbol indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken CAUTION without a safety alert symbol indicates that prop
134. SMAC CS1 SYSMAC alpha and CP Hostlink Multilink SYSMAC Way Modicon Schneider Automation PLC series Modicon 984 TSX Quantum and TSX Compact Modbus RTU 5 Modicon Schneider Automation PLC series e Quantum Momentum Premium and Micro e Compact and 984 via Ethernet bridge Modbus TCP IP Ethernet Telemechanique PLC series e TSX 7 with P47 411 e TSX 7 with P47 67 87 107 420 e TSX 7 with P47 67 87 107 425 e Module TSX SCM 21 6 with aforementioned TSX 7 CPUs e TSX 17 with module SCG 1161 e TSX 37 Micro e TSX 57 Premium Uni Telway 5 1 Not supported for connections to SIMATIC S7 212 2 Applies to PLCs SLC503 SLC504 SLC505 PLC5 MicroLogix 3 Applies to PLCs SLC504 PLC5 over DF 1 3 Applies to PLCs SLC500 to SLC 505 and MicroLogix 5 PROFINET IO must be locked 6 The Remote Control check box at Channel 1 in the Transfer Settings must be deactivated Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0AB0 31 Overview 7 7 Communications Compressing the internal program memory with SIMATIC S5 32 caution Compressing the internal program memory Compressing the internal program memory of the SIMATIC S5 PLC Compress programming device function integrated FB COMPR is not permitted if an HMI device is connected When memory is compressed the absolute addresses of the blocks in the pro
135. TOP14 2 STOP13 Z Monitoring device ees Stop circuit or emergency off circuit DC 24 V Circuit 1 KA KB Ein i I i 1 Le 1 L2 KA SIRIUS 3TK2841 KB 3TK2822 All contacts of the safety relay contactor KA and KB are fitted with positively driven contacts in accordance with EN 50205 Monitoring outputs may not be used for safety related functions Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 284 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Appendix A 1 ESD guideline Definition of ESD All electronic modules are equipped with large scale integrated ICs or components Due to their design these electronic elements are highly sensitive to overvoltage and thus to any electrostatic discharge These electronic components are therefore specially identified as ESDs Abbreviations The following abbreviation is commonly used for electrostatic sensitive devices e EGB Elektrostatisch Gefahrdete Bauteile Baugruppen Germany e ESD Electrostatic Sensitive Device internationally recognized term Labeling ESDs are labeled with the following symbol Electrostatic charging CAUTION Electrostatic charging ESDs may be destroyed by voltages far below the level perceived by human beings Voltages of this kind develop when a component or an assembly is touched by a person who is not grounded against static electricity Usually it is unlikely that damage to an ESD as a result of overvol
136. The logon dialog is not opened The user action is not executed 260036 There are insufficient licenses on the SIMATIC Check the licensing on the SIMATIC Logon Server Logon Sever The logon is not authorized Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 308 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Appendix A 2 System alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 260037 There is no license on the SIMATIC Logon Sever Check the licensing on the SIMATIC Logon Server A logon is not possible It is not possible to log on via the SIMATIC Logon Server only via a local user 260040 The system attempts to access the SIMATIC Logon Check connection to the domain and its configuration Server upon system start up or when trying to change the password If attempting to log on the new user is not logged in If a different user was logged on before then this user is logged off in the Runtime security settings editor Or use a local user 270000 System alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 270000 A tag is not indicated in the alarm because it Check whether the data area for the tag exists in the attempts to access an invalid address in the PLC PLC the configured address is correct and the value range for the tag is correct 270001 There is a device specific limit as to how many alarms may be queued for output see the operating instructions This limit has been exceeded The view no
137. This duration applies to a 100 charge status The duration reduces as the charge reduces The LED F1 flashes for 30 seconds The HMI device then switches off Runtime is terminated The number of illuminated LEDs indicates the charge status as follows LED of the function keys lights up Charging status F2 F4 F6 F8 F10 100 F4 F6 F8 F10 lt 80 F6 F8 F10 lt 60 F8 F10 lt 40 F10 lt 20 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0AB0 Operator controls and displays 5 2 Operator controls of Mobile Panel 277 8 Note This applies to the storage of rechargeable batteries You can achieve the optimal service life for rechargeable batteries by storing them with 40 to 60 of their charge capacity Manufacturers recommend storage at 15 C a compromise between accelerated aging and self discharge A rechargeable battery should be charged every six months with 40 to 60 of its charge capacity The general rule is that a Lithium lon rechargeable battery has lost more than 50 of its charge capacity after approx three years Connecting the connection cable If the HMI device is still in Transfer mode and the connection cable is connected to the connection box the function of the Display charge status LEDs is disabled Runtime is called See chapter Connecting the Connecting Cable Page 75 5 2 7 Configuring the evaluation of operator control
138. a Box ID ss sssssssssnnesssnnnnssnasnnnnantannanennnnnannaannnaanannannnnnanennaane aa i A 3 2 Ensuring consistent values for operator controls 000 2 cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseenaeeeteenaees B ADDIGVIAHOMS ione ea aE a EA a a Ae AA E E EAA Gloss aly coi a e E E E E E cere eecir Te MAO OX EE E A AE E E E E A T E ede Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 14 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0AB0 Overview 1 1 1 Product Overview Expanded application options with Mobile Panel 277 SIMATIC Mobile Panels offer the option of making safety functions available on a mobile basis at any point of a machine or plant The Mobile Panel 277 compliments the product range at the high performance end of the spectrum in relation to the well known 170 and 177 series mobile HMI devices The Mobile Panel lets you use text or graphic based projects even more efficiently for simple and medium complexity control and monitoring tasks on machines and plants The Mobile Panel 277 is characterized by short commissioning times a large user memory high performance and is flexibly optimized for projects based on WinCC In addition the Mobile Panel 277 comes with the following features e PROFIBUS and Ethernet ports e 8 or 10 TFT screen with 64k colors e 18 function keys with LED on Mobile Panel 277 8 e Extended HMI functions Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO 15
139. age Card or a network path as the the storage location for a log This is not storage location permissible No values are written to this log and the log file is not created 80028 The alarm returns a status report indicating that the logs are currently being initialized No values are logged until the alarm 80026 is output 80029 The number of logs specified in the alarm could not Evaluate the additional system alarms related to this be initialized The logs are initialized alarm Check the configuration the ODBC Open The faulty log files are not available for logging Database Connectivity and the specified drive jobs 80030 The structure of the existing log file does not match Delete the existing log data manually in advance the expected structure Logging is stopped for this log Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO 293 Appendix A 2 System alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 80031 The log in CSV format is corrupted Delete the faulty file The log cannot be used 80032 Logs can be assigned events These are triggered Close WinCC flexible Runtime delete the log then as soon as the log is full If WinCC flexible Runtime restart WinCC flexible Runtime is started and the log is already full the event is not Or triggered Configure a button which contains the same actions as The log specified no longer
140. ain any project data Updating the operating system using ProSave Requirements 180 e The HMI device is connected to a PC on which ProSave is installed e When updating the operating system without reset to factory settings The data channel is configured on the HMI device Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Commissioning a project Procedure 7 7 Updating the operating system Proceed as follows 1 11 Result When updating the operating system with reset to factory settings Switch off power to the HMI device From the Windows Start menu start ProSave on the PC Select the HMI device type in the General tab Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the PC then set the connection parameters Select the OS Update tab You can specify operating system updates with or without reset to factory settings by activating deactivating the Reset to factory settings check box In Image path select the HMI device image file img The HMI device image files are available under WinCC flexible Images in the WinCC flexible installation folder or on the WinCC flexible installation CD Information on the version of the HMI device image file is displayed in the output area after you have successfully opened the file Only when updating the operating system without reset to factory settings Set Transfer mode on the HMI device If autom
141. an ESD Do so by touching grounded metallic parts Always use grounded measuring instruments Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 286 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Appendix A 2 Introduction System alarms A 2 System alarms System alarms on the HMI device provide information about internal states of the HMI device and PLC The following overview shows the causes of system alarms and how to eliminate the cause of error Some of the system alarms described in this section are relevant to individual HMI devices based on their range of features Note System alarms are only indicated if an alarm window was configured System alarms are output in the language currently set on your HMI device System alarm parameters System alarms may contain encrypted parameters which are relevant to troubleshooting because they provide a reference to the source code of the runtime software These parameters are output after the text Error code Meaning of the system alarms All the system alarms that can be displayed are listed below The system alarms are divided into different ranges 10000 Printer alarms Number Effect cause Remedy 10000 The print job could not be started or was canceled Check the printer settings cable connections and the due to an unknown error Faulty printer setup Or power supply No authorization is available for accessing the Set up the print
142. atic transfer mode is enabled on the HMI device the device automatically sets Transfer mode when an update is initiated Select Update OS on the PC to run the operating system update Only when updating the operating system with reset to factory settings Switch on the power supply to the HMI device Follow the instructions in ProSave During the operating system update a status view opens to indicate progress A message is displayed when the operating system update is successfully completed The HMI device does no longer contain any project data Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 181 Commissioning a project 7 8 Installing and removing options 7 8 7 8 1 Installing and removing options Overview Installing and removing options 7 8 2 You can install options on the HMI device for example additional programs developed especially for the HMI device You can also remove the option from the HMI device again Note License key A license key may be needed to run an option The license key unlocks the option for use Installing and removing options using WinCC flexible Requirements The HMI device is connected to a configuring PC No project is open in WinCC flexible The data channel is configured on the HMI device Procedure for installing an option 182 Proceed as follows 1 On the configuring PC select the Communication settings c
143. ation Mobile Panel 277 Alarm Number of discrete alarms 4 000 Number of analog alarms 200 Length of the alarm text 80 characters Number of tags in an alarm Max 8 Display Alarm line Alarm window Alarm view Acknowledge error alarms individually Yes Acknowledge several error alarms simultaneously group 16 alarm groups acknowledgment of alarm groups Edit alarm Yes Alarm indicator Yes ALARM_S Display S7 alarms Yes Alarm buffer retentive Alarm buffer capacity 512 alarms Simultaneously queued alarm events Max 250 View alarm Yes Delete alarm buffer Yes Line by line printing of alarms Yes Tags values and lists Object Specification Mobile Panel 277 Tag Number 2 048 Limit value monitoring Input Output Yes Linear scaling Input Output Yes Text list Number 500 1 Graphics list Number 400 1 1 The maximum total of text and graphics lists is 500 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO 27 Overview 7 5 Functional scope with WinCC flexible Screens Object Specification Mobile Panel 277 screen Number 500 Fields per screen 200 Tags per screen 200 Complex objects per screen e g bars 10 Template Yes Recipes Object Specification Mobile Panel 277 Recipe Number 300 Data records per recipe 500 Entries per recipe 1 000 Recipe memory 64 KB Memory location Memory card 1
144. battery is an optional accessory The OP Properties dialog Accu tab displays the remaining capacity and temperature of the rechargeable battery Requirements You have opened the Accu tab in the OP Properties dialog box by pressing the OP ie icon OP Properties Display Device Touch 0 Procedure Proceed as follows Capacity 9S Temperature 26 C Se 0 Memory Monite 4 gt 100 70 1 You can refresh the view by pressing the Update button 2 Close the dialog Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 163 Configuring the operating system 6 11 Activate Memory Management 6 11 Activate Memory Management Memory management Requirements Procedure Result 164 If reorganization of the memory is required during the runtime of project the HMI device can shut down the project autonomously The project is shut down and the HMI device will display a message You have to restart the project NOTICE If you do not activate memory management undefined states can occur during the runtime of the project You have opened the Memory Monitoring tab in the OP Properties dialog box by pressing the OP Micon OP Properties Current used memory Maximum used memory 13 10 O The maximum used memory since last power on of the HMI device and the current us
145. ble 306 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Appendix A 2 System alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 250002 The tag in the specified line in Status Force is not Check the set address updated because it is not possible to map the PLC type in the tag type 250003 An attempt to connect to the PLC failed The tags Check the connection to the PLC Check that the PLC are not updated is switched on and is online 260000 Password system alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 260000 An unknown user or an unknown password has Log on to the system as a user with a valid password been entered in the system The current user is logged off from the system 260001 The logged in user does not have sufficient Log on to the system as a user with sufficient authorization to execute the protected functions on authorization the system 260002 This alarm is triggered by the system function TrackUserChange 260003 The user has logged off from the system 260004 The user name entered into the user view already Select another user name because user names have exists in the user management to be unique in the user management 260005 The entry is discarded Enter a shorter user name 260006 The entry is discarded Use a shorter or longer password 260007 The logon timeout value entered is outside the valid Enter a logon timeout value between 0 an
146. ble shows the permitted climatic ambient conditions for use of the connection box Ambient conditions Permitted range Comments Temperature See the Mounting positions and type of e Operation e From 0 C to 50 C fixation section e Storage Transport e From 20 C to 70 C Relative humidity e Operation e 35 to 85 e Storage Transport e 35 to 85 Without condensation corresponds to a relative humidity stress class 2 in accordance with IEC 61131 part 2 Atmospheric pressure 1080 hPa to 795 hPa Corresponds to an elevation of 1 000 to 2 000 m Pollutant concentration SOz lt 0 5 ppm Relative humidity lt 60 no condensation Test 10 cm3 m3 10 days H2S lt 0 1 ppm Relative humidity lt 60 no condensation Test 1 cm m3 10 days 3 2 Mounting positions and type of fixation Mounting position The wall holder is designed for vertical mounting The connection box is designed for surface mounting independently of cabinets or control panels The connection box is self ventilated and is approved for all mounting positions Note that the guaranteed protection rating is only ensured if the connecting cable or the dummy cap is plugged into the connection box Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO 47 Planning application 3 3 Preparing for mounting 3 3 Preparing for mounting Choose the mounting location for the
147. bling PROFINET lO 2 0 24 2008 dial een ea ala a eee 6 8 Configuring network op ratiON s ssis uneia sa ERa E A Eaa Ea EEEE RE 149 6 8 1 Overview Of network operatios iingie Ea aE a E E EEEE 149 6 8 2 Setting the device name of the HMI device sssssssseiseserrsseerssrrrsstirrsttrnssttrrnnttnsstnnnnntennsen nnt 6 8 3 Changing the Network Configuration c cece ceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeesecaeeeseeaaeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeeenaeeeaes 6 8 4 Changing the Logon Datel sc eccicesee coddeces opctactr Meeuqcn cts epettet A apse dl penne ieee ciceeecs eadedenea 6 8 5 Changing E Mail Settings sses ccccccscecesecsseceevstsceseedteneedestenceecttsnsecsisaseccncseeedsbseeevencadeeseandenaeeeenaas 6 8 6 Changing internet setings i cisere caterer hvac viet AAA EAR AAA aa AA E AEN DAAN 6 8 6 1 Changing General Internet Settings sesseeeeesseeieeseereeerssterrssttnnsttnrnaternnnttnnsttnnnntnn naten nanne ana 0 08 62 Setting the Proxy Sanel sissen a E denne 0 38 63 Changing Privacy Seling S e ncnseaa EEA 157 6 8 6 4 Importing and Deleting CertificateS aeeseeeseeeesrniscerreerrueseernnerrnesrraraerenuettnndatnnanatunaarenarennaaed 6 9 Backup and Restore with the Memory Card esseeesssseeserresrsrueseerserrnnestennaernnestennaerenestennaaennnant 6 10 Display rechargeable battery charge level aesssusseeecrreersreseerreersrnesennearrnnssrennerennastennaaenanne 163 6 11 Activate Memory Management sessecisicrieisiciriieiiireseeincaruseteara
148. cally started when the HMI device is switched on After the operating system has been loaded the Loader opens Configuration software Software used to generate projects used for the purpose of process visualization An example of configuring software is WinCC flexible Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 325 Glossary Configuring PC Display duration Diversity EMC Event Field array Flash memory Function keys A configuring PC is a programming device or PC on which plant projects are created using an engineering software Defines whether a system alarm is displayed on the HMI device and the duration of the display In technology diversity refers to a strategy to increase the failsafe abilities This is why systems are designed redundantly However a conscious effort is made to use different realizations and individual systems that are not similar in structure Electromagnetic compatibility is the ability of electrical equipment to function properly in its electromagnetic environment without influencing this environment Functions are triggered by defined incoming events Events can be configured Events which can be assigned to a button include Press and Release for example Area reserved in configured screens for the input and output of values Non volatile memory with EEPROM chips used as mobile storage medium or as memory module installed permanently
149. ccording to EN 954 1 1996 safety related features of PLCs EN 954 1 category 3 is achievable with an external monitoring device 2 parallel switched floating make contacts for connection of external I O rated voltage of 24 VDC safety extra low voltage in accordance with EN 61131 2 or EN 50178 maximum current of 400 mA If the HMI device is used in a system the following standards are fulfilled 36 prEN 1921 Industrial automation systems safety of integrated manufacturing systems EN 12417 2001 Machine tools safety machining centers UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment CSA C22 2 No 14 Industrial Control Equipment Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Safety instructions and general notes 2 4 Voltage supply 2 4 Voltage supply Safety specifications A WARNING The HMI device corresponds to protection class III according to EN 61131 2 or EN 50178 The 24 VDC supply must be isolated from touch hazardous voltages for example by means of a safety isolation transformer or similar equipment Protect the power supply circuit with a 3 15 A fuse Allowance should be made for the loss of voltage on the connecting cable during dimensional analysis of the supply 2 5 Notes about Usage Use in industry The HMI device is designed for industrial use For this reason the following standards are met e Requirements for emissions EN 61000 6
150. ch you can influence the export depends on the configuration Requirements e A screen with a recipe view is displayed e An operating element with the function Export record has been configured e The following tags are configured equally in the recipe view and for the Export record operating element Recipe number Data record number Procedure Proceed as follows 1 If the recipe view contains several recipes Select the recipe which contains the desired recipe data record 2 Select the recipe data record you want to export 3 Operate the operating element which was configured for export for example the Export data record button The data record is exported as a CSV file to an external data medium Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation Result The recipe data record is exported Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 251 Operating recipes 10 9 Importing a recipe data record 10 9 Importing a recipe data record Introduction You can import values from a CSV file to a recipe data record depending on the configuration Requirements e An operating element with the function Import data record has been configured for example a button e Ascreen with a recipe view is displayed Procedure Proceed as follows 1 If the recipe view contains several recipes Select the recipe which contains the recipe data record
151. ck networks the status of the addresses and exclusion addresses ProAgent cannot indicate any faulty addresses 320008 The diagnostic data stored in the configuration are Transfer the project to the HMI device again not synchronized with those in the PLC ProAgent can only indicate the diagnostic units 320009 The diagnostic data stored in the configuration are Transfer the project to the HMI device again not synchronized with those in the PLC The diagnostic screens can be operated as usual ProAgent may be unable to show all diagnostic texts 320010 The diagnostic data stored in the configuration are Transfer the project to the HMI device again not synchronized with those in STEP7 The ProAgent diagnostics data is not up to date 320011 A unit with the corresponding DB number and FB Check the parameters of the SelectUnit function and number does not exist the units selected in the project The function cannot be executed 320012 The Step sequence mode dialog is no longer Use the ZP_STEP step sequence screen from the supported corresponding standard project for your project Instead of calling the Overview_Step_Sequence_Mode function call the FixedScreenSelection function using ZP_STEP as the screen name 320014 The selected PLC cannot be evaluated for Check the parameters of the ProAgent The Alarm view assigned to the EvaluateAlarmDisplayFault system function could not be found EvaluateAlarmDisplayFault syste
152. closed The operator action will therefore not be must be opened again using the system function executed OpenAllLogs Change the configuration as required 90028 The password you entered is incorrect Enter the correct password 90029 Runtime was closed during ongoing operation Ensure that you are using the correct storage medium perhaps due to a power failure or a storage medium in use is incompatible with Audit Trail An Audit Trail is not suitable if it belongs to another project or has already be archived 90030 Runtime was closed during ongoing operation perhaps due to a power failure 90031 Runtime was closed during ongoing operation perhaps due to a power failure 90032 Running out of space on the storage medium for Make more space available by inserting an empty log storage medium or swapping out the log files on the server using ExportLog 90033 No more space on the storage medium for log As Make more space available by inserting an empty of now no more operator actions requiring logging storage medium or swapping out the log files on the will be executed server using ExportLog 90039 You do not have the necessary authorization to Adapt or upgrade your authorizations perform this action 90040 Audit Trail is switched off because of a forced user Activate the Audit Trail again using the system action function StartLog 90041 A user action which has to be logged has been A user action requiring logg
153. contact Customer Support Forward the relevant error code to Customer Support 290041 A record or file cannot be saved because the Delete files no longer required storage location is full 290042 An attempt was made to execute several recipe Trigger the action again after waiting a short period actions simultaneously The last action was not executed 290043 Confirmation request before storing records 290044 The data store for the recipe has been destroyed and is deleted 290050 Alarm reporting that the export of records has started 290051 Alarm reporting that the export of records was completed 290052 Alarm reporting that the export of records was Ensure that the structure of the records at the storage canceled due to an error location and the current recipe structure on the HMI device are identical 290053 Alarm reporting that the import of records has started Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 312 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Appendix A 2 System alarms Number 290054 Effect causes Alarm reporting that the import of records was completed Remedy 290055 Alarm reporting that the import of records was canceled due to an error Ensure that the structure of the records at the storage location and the current recipe structure on the HMI device are identical 290056 Error when reading writing the value in the specified line column The action was canceled Check
154. ctions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 157 Configuring the operating system 6 8 Contiguring network operation Procedure Proceed as follows 1 Select the required cookie behavior by means of the option buttons Accept Cookies are stored without request Block Cookies will not be stored Prompt Cookies will be stored on request 2 If you want allow cookies which are restricted to a single session activate the Always allow session cookies checkbox 3 Change to the Advanced tab Internet Options V Use SSL 2 0 Use SSL 3 0 Use TLS 1 0 Warn if changing between secure and not secure mode 4 Activate the required encryption protocol 5 Confirm your entries The dialog closes Result The logon information has now been set Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 158 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Contiguring the operating system 6 8 Configuring network operation 6 8 6 4 Importing and Deleting Certificates Overview Requirements Procedure Result You can import view and delete certificates that have been imported for the HMI device The certificates differ in the following ways e Certificates that you trust e Own certificates e Other certificates You can import additional certificates and delete certificates that are not required The required settings can be obtained from your network administrator You have opened the Certificates dialog box
155. ctive input object to make entries Use the screen keyboard of the HMI device to enter the new values in the text boxes Touch a button to operate it Touch the selection box to open a drop down list box Touch the required entry from the drop down list box Touch the check box to activate or deactivate a check box Touch a radio button to select it Confirm the selection with the button or abort the entry with the x button The dialog closes Close the Control Panel with the x button Start the project by pressing the Start button in the Loader Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Contiguring the operating system 6 2 Control Panel Input with the screen keyboard A screen keyboard is available for data input The screen keyboard is displayed as soon as you touch a text box You can also call up the screen keyboard directly from the Control Panel Display methods for the screen keyboard You can change the display method for the screen keyboard and the position on the screen can be fixed Confirm the entry with the button or abort the entry with the key Either action closes the screen keyboard e Numerical screen keyboard The alphanumerical screen keyboard has various levels Normal level Shift level e Reduced screen keyboard Changing the display of the screen keyboard Key Function T Switching between the
156. cuted independent of the current screen contents The following objects can be configured as a direct key e Buttons e Function keys e Screen numbers e Handwheel e lluminated pushbutton e Key operated switch Note Direct keys You can only use direct keys when coupled to PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO Direct keys result in additional basic load on the HMI device Further information about direct keys is available in the system manual WinCC flexible communication Enabling PROFINET IO Page 148 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Operating a project 8 3 Setting the project language 8 3 Setting the project language Introduction The HMI device supports multilingual projects You must have configured a corresponding operating element which lets you change the language setting on the HMI device during runtime The project always starts with the language set in the previous session Requirements e The required language for the project must be available on the HMI device e The language switching function must be logically linked to a configured operating element such as a button Selecting a language You can change project languages at any time Language specific objects are immediately output to the screen in the new language when you switch languages The following options are available for switching the language e Aconfigured operating elemen
157. d 60 range of 0 to 60 minutes minutes The new value is discarded and the original value is retained 260008 An attempt was made to read a PTProRun pwil file created with ProTool V 6 0 in WinCC flexible Reading the file was canceled due to incompatibility of the format 260009 You have attempted to delete the user Admin or If you need to delete a user because perhaps you PLC User These users are fixed components of have exceeded the maximum number permitted the user management and cannot be deleted delete another user 260012 The passwords entered in the Change Password You have to log on to the system again Then enter the dialog and the confirmation field are not identical identical password twice to be able to change the The password has not been changed User will be password logged off 260013 The password entered in the Change Password You have to log on to the system again Then enter a dialog is invalid because it is already in use new password that has not been used before The password has not been changed User will be logged off 260014 You have tried unsuccessfully to log on three times You can log on to the system with your correct in succession password Only an administrator can change the You will be locked out and assigned to group no 0 assignment to a group 260023 The password you entered does not meet the Enter a password that contains at least one number necessary security guidelines
158. d from the Configuring PC to the HMI device when at least one of the data channels is enabled on the HMI device If the HMI device is in Transfer mode while changes are made to the transfer settings the settings only go into effect after the transfer function is restarted You have opened the S7 Transfer Settings dialog box by pressing the S7 Transfer Settings ii icon S7 Transfer Settings OK 1 Properties I 0 Network selection Button for opening the properties dialog Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 143 Configuring the operating system 6 7 Communication settings Procedure 144 Proceed as follows 1 2 Select a network Open the MPI or PROFIBUS dialog with the Properties button Station Parameters MV Panel is the only master on the bus O Address i nC Time out 1s SS Network Parameters ar Transmission Rate 187 5 kbits s Eg Highest Station 126 EJ PROFIBUS Station Parameters AE MV Panel is the only master on the bus n 0 Address Time out Highest Station Address 126 DP Profile The HMI device is the only master on the bus Bus address of the HMI device Time out Data transmission rate in total network Highest station address in the network Profile PGB QHOOHO Button for displaying the bus parameters If more masters are connec
159. d not be installed on this PC Commissioning and recommissioning e When the HMI device is commissioned there is no project at first The HMI device is also in this state after the operating system has been updated e When recommissioning any project already on the HMI device is replaced Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 165 Commissioning a project 7 2 Operating modes 7 2 Operating modes Operating modes The HMI device may be in the following operating modes e Offline e Online e Transfer Offline mode and Online mode can be set on both the configuring PC and the HMI device To set these modes on the HMI device use a corresponding operating element of the project Changing the operating mode The configuration engineer must have configured an appropriate operating element to allow a change of the operating mode on the HMI device during ongoing operation Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation Offline operating mode In this mode there is no communication between the HMI device and PLC Although the HMI device can be operated it cannot exchange data with the PLC Online operating mode In this mode the HMI device and PLC communicate You can operate the plant on the HMI device according to your system configuration Transfer mode In this mode you can transfer a project from the configuring PC to the HMI device or
160. d restore e WinCC flexible e ProSave General information NOTICE Power failure If a complete restore operation is interrupted due to power failure on the HMI device the operating system of the HMI device may be deleted The operating system then has to be updated Compatibility conflict If a message is output on the HMI device warning of a compatibility conflict during the restore operation the operating system must be updated Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 174 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Commissioning a project 7 6 Backup and restore 7 6 2 Backup and restore using WinCC flexible Requirements The HMI device is connected to a configuring PC No project is open in WinCC flexible The data channel is configured on the HMI device Procedure for backup Proceed as follows 1 Result Select a destination folder and a file name for the On the configuring PC select the Communication settings command in the menu Project gt Transfer in WinCC flexible The Communication Settings dialog opens Select the type of HMI device Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the configuring PC Set the connection parameters Close the dialog with OK Select the Backup command in the menu Project gt Transfer in WinCC flexible The Backup Settings dialog opens Select the data to be backed up Wk psb backup file
161. d when they are touched No optical operation feedback is provided in this case The configuration engineer may however configure invisible buttons so that their outline appears as lines when touched This outline remains visible until you select another operator control e O fields When you select an I O field the content of the I O field is displayed against a colored background With touch operation a screen keyboard is displayed for the entering of values Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 191 Operating a project 8 2 Direct keys 8 2 Direct keys Introduction Direct keys See also 192 Direct keys on the HMI device are used to set bits in the I O area of a SIMATIC S7 Direct keys enable operations with short reaction times that are for example a jog mode requirement NOTICE Removing the connecting cable Note that when removing the connecting cable this corresponds to a failure of a PROFIBUS DP slave or PROFINET IO device and therefore causes a PLC stop Determine suitable program technical measures in the PLC in order to prevent a PLC stop Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation NOTICE Direct keys are still active when the HMI device is in offline mode NOTICE If you operate a function key with direct key functionality in a running project the direct key function is always exe
162. das aan Aaa iaaa ia Eaa 1 7 COmmMm NICAtONS acd cveteca see ipni i i aa A AAEE AREE 2 Safety instructions and general NOteS ccccsssssscsssecceeeesssseseeceeeeesseceseeeeeceessseaeeeeeesesseseaeeeeeseseeseesessees 2 1 Safety IMStUCHIONS sererierci nerina E EEEE AE EENET EERE TEER 2 2 Standards Cetificates and Approvals ccccccceeeeeeeeneeceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseccacaeeeeeeeecencaeeeeeteeteeeess 2 3 Operating Satety cece cectecedlvccceshebiedecesthecesielce idee ecci E EENE ETE AEE 2 4 Voltage Supply si ise cis ive Be cd uate easter eteeis da headed veered ieee dyna he vada ede ad ade A eee 2 5 Notes about Usage ecarraano pa a a E E Geel gielansnesae readied 2 6 RISK AMAlYSIS 35 cetixs coins edeeck oct oatves tate stneet Rahn edie edd deiees hie outdated 2 7 Enablingi Switch sic tecavendternes ieee A E cba nang ok aialdy 2 8 STOP Button ies snctyceccncteaaescdccnceuaczak aad aa a a a ana danaedeacaauged a T A 2 9 Electromagnetic Compatibility cc ccceeeeeeenee nee eset ee seein ee eee aeeeeeeieeeeetaaeeeesaeeeeeseeeesieeeaeeeenena 2 10 Transport and Storage Conditions 0 cc eceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeenneeaes 3 Planning er 0 eee 3 1 Notes about Usage 00 eect entre ne eee eee eee neers eee ARAE 3 2 Mounting positions and type of fiXAtiON 2 ee eee cece ee eete eee ente ee eee ae eee taeee ee taeeeeeaeeeeetneeeee ered 3 3 Preparing for MOUNTING
163. data record you want to delete Open the menu Select the menu command 1 Delete The data record is deleted See also Recipes in the project Page 232 248 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Operating recipes 10 7 Operating the simple recipe view 10 7 5 Reading a recipe data record from the PLC Introduction The values of recipe elements are exchanged with the PLC via tags In the current project the values which are also stored in the recipes in the HMI device can be changed directly in the plant This is the case for example if a valve was opened further directly at the plant than is stored in the recipe The values of the tags on the HMI device possibly no longer match the values in the PLC To synchronize the recipe values read the values from the PLC and display them in the recipe view Requirements A screen with a simple recipe view is displayed Procedure Proceed as follows 1 If the recipe list contains several recipes Select the recipe which contains the desired recipe data record 2 Select the element list of the recipe data record to which you want to apply the values from the PLC 3 Open the menu 4 Select the menu command 2 from PLC The values are read from the PLC 5 If you want to save the display values in the HMI device select the menu command 0 Save Result The values were read from the PLC displayed on the HMI device and
164. deeereerntent eee 6 4 Changing Password ProtettioN ssscssos mips eaiaie no 6 5 Changing HMI device Selling errs reeset anpievannesaeeeeredeantesaee 129 6 5 1 Setting the date and M eeererisreneniriiiriieiireknn is na E EE EE EE EEA ERER 6 5 2 Changing Regional SetuingS ssssspiassyasgisssnid dys EEEREN taeda A 131 6 5 3 Backing up Registry Mioma seraa n a a A A ASA AA E vad 6 5 4 Changing Screen Settings ec ceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeseeeeeseenaeeeseiaeeeseeeeseaes 6 5 5 Selling the screen Savel sesioan ee peedaces A igseesntaedeteandwedeacdaa 6 5 6 Changing the Printer Properties 0 0 0 ccceccceeeeceeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeaeeseeaaeeeeeeaeeseenaeeeseeeeeseeeeeeaaes 6 5 7 Restarting the MI DEVICES sssi isup oaoa a eaaa EEEa aE 138 6 5 8 Displaying Information about the HMI Device ssssrssisissnsrsssrrstnttntntantntnntntnntnt nennen rennene 139 6 5 9 Displaying System Properties cece eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseneeeeeseeeaeeseeaeeaaeees 6 6 Setting the Delay Time cecceeeeeeeeeeene ee cee ceeaeeeseeeeeeseeeaeeeseeaeeeseeaaeeeseaaeeeseeaeeesnsaeeeaeeeeneaes 6 7 Communication SETINGS eee cece eeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeeseeaeeeseeaeeeeeenteeseeeeeeaaes 6 7 1 Changing MPI PROFIBUS DP Settings 6 7 2 Configuring the data Channel cccccccccsscseeceecseecneececeeceseesaeeeeesecsecsaecseeseesscsasesaeacnestaeseesaenes 145 6 7 3 Ena
165. der extreme temperature variations The HMI device must have acquired room temperature before it is put into operation Do not expose the HMI device to direct radiation from a heater in order to warm it up If dewing has developed wait approximately four hours until the HMI device has dried completely before switching it on Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO 43 Safety instructions and general notes 44 2 10 Transport and Storage Conditions The following points must be adhered to in order to ensure a fault free and safe operation of the HMI device e Proper transportation and storage e Proper installation and mounting e Careful operation and maintenance The warranty for the HMI device will be deemed void if these stipulations are not heeded Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Planning application 3 1 Notes about Usage Mechanical and climatic conditions of use The HMI device is designed for use in a location protected from the effects of the weather The conditions of use are compliant with requirements to DIN IEC 60721 3 3 e Class 3M3 mechanical requirements e Class 3K3 climatic requirements Use with additional measures Examples of applications where the use of the HMI device requires additional measures e In locations with a high degree of ionizing radiation e In locations with difficult operating
166. ditndneaindaituanadataaieduanenndaanaaa tea 164 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0AB0 11 Table of contents 12 Commissioning a projetesis tritonus a aa ie eaa aaa i aA EAE naar EEan aaka iaioa 7 1 WGI VIG W 2 525 setae e a E E E ET E cea 7 2 Operating MOSS ssscccesscedeceiisceveriadccesaundeieci Mitecenavantecnsditeveciideecuisnceebasiniveas edecesiadcepriatalaceedeasans 166 7 3 Using existing projets ic cececdeddideetndeien dacedeeebinieiva isles nadeenladebernndesiviielestdadeelilesieceeviaees 167 7 4 Data Transmission OptiOns 0 i ccsiadcccivedecdensualecaviebe teceveusedscduenecsevesiudieuecuceeveladacaueadsceuuecsccehescneess 167 7 5 Transfer te sacesst iharas E E E Mio eta ndtdes Soate vet esdataate 168 7 5 1 OVER VIGW 852 522227 eee Sebcheb ideas get T cit Gi ieee teed eae ee ME eevee E 168 7 5 2 Slarting manual ansio sssaaa ku nena S EE EATE AA SEE EE EE a 7 5 3 Starting automatic transfef ss sisic cceceeeckenes ceccecbesceaccandasecbeseecsttterenthendbessenensesttetentteatadeceestent 170 7 5 4 Starting DACKtrANSTED scassi cee ce cte ene ea anaE AREE a R AEE aE A EEEE 171 7 5 5 Tes ng a Projeti eccrine i ir E E EREA E A AE 7 6 Back p and FOSlONG ice scciscctceed cxsaacagacnnccedeedarnansatannedadsien a aaa aada aaia aa 7 6 1 Ea E E E E cccta edededaneaeentaecctdaace we edavnieedearce 7 6 2 Backup and restore using WinCC flexible 175 7 6 3 Backup and restore USING ProSave
167. e Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 205 Operating a project 8 9 Operating the trend view Ruler Operation Operation 206 When configured a ruler is available to provide an exact reading of the trend values in the value table You can move the ruler to the desired position of the trend view The trend view can be operated as follows Enlarge or reduce the display of time intervals Scroll forward or back by one display width Stop and resume trend recording Move the ruler Hide and display the ruler The following table shows the trend view buttons Functions Stops or continues trend recording Zooms the displayed time section Zooms out of the displayed time section Scrolls one display width backwards to the left Scrolls one display width forwards to the right Scrolls back to the beginning of the trend recording The start values of the trend recording are displayed there Moves the ruler backwards to the left Moves the ruler forwards to the right Inserts or removes the ruler PS Y AAA AAA In addition the configuration engineer can configure function keys or operating elements with which you can control trend views Please refer to your system documentation to check whether additional information on this subject is available there Touch the required button in the trend view The positi
168. e but the characters will not be entered You have the following options to enter a value The selected value is deleted when you enter the first character Completely reenter the value Use the E and E keys to move the cursor within the current value You can now edit the characters of the current value or add characters Use the key to delete the character to the left of the cursor If the value is selected use this key to delete the selected part of the value The Del key deletes the character positioned to the right of the cursor If the value is selected use this key to delete the selected part of the value _ Use the Hel key to display the infotext of the I O field This key is only enabled if infotext has been configured for the input object or the current screen 3 Use the lt key to confirm your entry or cancel it with ESC Either action closes the screen keyboard Result You have changed the numerical value or entered a new one Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 196 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Operating a project 8 4 Entering values using the touch screen 8 4 3 Entering and editing alphanumerical values Alphanumerical screen keyboard Keyboard levels Procedure When you touch an operating element for numerical input on the HMI device touch screen the alphanumerical screen keyboard appears This is the case for example for a text box The screen keyboard is automatically
169. e system function from the Calculation group 16 Select the Operator_Control_PLC tag at Tag output 17 Select the Status_Operator_Control tag as Value Result The values for the operator control elements are consistent between operator control element HMI device and PLC Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 322 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Abbreviations ANSI CPU CSV CTS DC DCD DHCP DIL DNS DP DSN DSR DTR ESD EMC PPI Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible American National Standards Institution Central Processing Unit Comma Separated Values Clear To Send Direct Current Data Carrier Detect Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Dual in Line electronic chip housing design Domain Name System Distributed I O Data Source Name Data Set Ready Data Terminal Ready Input and Output Components and modules endangered by electrostatic discharge Electromagnetic Compatibility European standard Engineering System Components and modules endangered by electrostatic discharge Ground High Frequency Human Machine Interface International Electronic Commission Interface Internet Protocol Light Emitting Diode Media Access Control Metal Oxide Semiconductor Multipoint Interface SIMATIC S7 Microsoft Mean Time Between Failures Not connected Operator Panel Personal Computer Programming device Point to Point Interface SIMATIC S7 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6
170. e HMI device to the configuring PC If the connection is not available or is defective an error message is displayed on the configuring PC After successful backtransfer the project is opened on the configuring PC in WinCC flexible 7 5 5 Testing a project Introduction 172 There are two options to test a project Test the project on the configuring PC You can test a project at a configuring PC using a simulator For detailed information refer to the WinCC flexible user manual and to the WinCC flexible Online Help Offline testing of the project on the HMI device Offline testing means that communication between the HMI device and PLC is down while the test is being carried out Online testing of the project on the HMI device Online testing means that the HMI device and PLC communicate with each other during testing Perform the tests starting with the Offline test followed by the Online test Note You should always test the project on the HMI device on which the project will be used Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO Commissioning a project 7 5 Transfer Check the following 1 Check the correct layout of the screens 2 Check the screen navigation 3 Check the input objects 4 Enter the tag values The test increases the certainty that the project will run error free on the HMI device Requirements for offline testing Procedure e Th
171. e PLC Possible causes flexible Runtime must be granted the right to change e An invalid time was transferred in the job the system time of the operating system mailbox e The Windows user has no right to modify the system time If the first parameter in the system alarm is displayed with the value 13 the second parameter indicates the byte containing the incorrect value 70012 An error occurred when executing the function Close all programs currently running StopRuntime with the option Runtime and Then close Windows operating system Windows and WinCC flexible Runtime are not closed One possible cause is that other programs cannot be closed 70013 The system time could not be modified because an Check the time which is to be set invalid value was entered Incorrect separators may have been used Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO 289 Appendix A 2 System alarms Number 70014 Effect causes The system time could not be modified Possible causes e Aninvalid time was transferred e The Windows user has no right to modify the system time Windows rejects the setting request Remedy Check the time which is to be set Using Windows NT XP The user executing WinCC flexible Runtime must be granted the right to change the system time of the operating system 70015 The system time could not be read because Windows rejects the reading func
172. e Pad EA AAA A acta eae AA E E a Aa A a Made eae 1 2 2 Structure of Mobile Panel 277 8 asiriga nanasa aieiaa a i aa a a a aa a a 1 2 3 Structure of Mobile Panel 277 10 oo ccecececenccceceeeeeeeceeeeceeeeeseeeeaaeeeeeeseseceacaeeeeseseceaceeeeeneeeeeeess 1 3 Accessory kit for Mobile Panel 277 8 oo eeccceeeeencneeeeeseneeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeseenaeeesenaeeeeeenaeeeeenaeeaaes 1 4 ANCCESSOMES ie sisciaguspanseicaseavdsdupevanee cessiacdup vas tadesesdhagadeasieddeussadadie adestardveaeersadiievisiaen NIES TEANNEN 1 4 1 Connecting Cable 2 cece eceeeeeecne cece snes eee ee eneee seein ee eee aeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeeaeeeeenaeeessieeaaeeeesenaeeeee 1 4 2 Connection BOX oiccsasiccccscasadeses cadccatnaneccaiases otacequardducal ned cdenaaddacaaeadesenanadedea sad caanhed E A E 1 4 3 Rechargeable buffer battery 2 0 0 eee cece eee eee reer entrees ene ee ee eae eee teeeeetaeeee sees anina aa 1 4 4 WV All Nolde aneis a a a e tabacasn weaunceah a a eaa aa e a a aara a 1 4 5 PO PPU Cable niiesecehancates tte sactsleeats aeaea eaa a ai aeaa daaa aanika Gaa aa osada 1 4 6 USB PPI Cable ninoio iae anaaean oieaaaaa a aaa aaa ki aaeain e iea aaaan 1 4 7 Protective foil qecnrana a A E A EAE aaa 1 4 8 TOUGH PONS scierie a a hes ein eed E E ee A A EAA E 1 4 9 Memon Cad ersi e A E REE AE 1 5 Functional scope with WinCC flexible ccccceceeeeeecee cece eeeeeceeeaeeeeeeseceeaaeceeeseeseccueaeeeeeeeeeneees 1 6 Software OPOS orcii a a a aa vag ntees ban
173. e Panel 277 Observe the following when connecting the connection cable e The HMI device is switched off e The HMI device is in Transfer mode Having connected the connection cable the following is activated immediately Runtime on the HMI device The display The touch The membrane keyboard All other operator controls and software independent enabling and emergency off buttons CAUTION Connecting HMI devices with activated buttons When you connect an HMI device to the connection box activated operator controls are immediately evaluated This can cause unintentional responses Check the position of the operator controls and do not activate any operator controls before or during the connection Reconnecting the connection cable The behavior of the HMI device after a reconnection is different to the behavior after a restart Depending on the configuration in the system this different behavior can bring about undesirable situations Check to see if it makes sense to adapt the project and instruct your operators e g in the evaluation of the startup bit Procedure for inserting the connector Proceed as follows 1 Align the red positioning mark of the connector with the positioning mark of the socket of the connection box 2 Insert the connector into the socket of the connection box Do not tilt the connector when inserting it The connector is locked after you have inserted it Unintenti
174. e Panel 277 8 EREEESEH SEAS Satie al PROFINET Standard S7 via TCP IP SIMATIC S7 NOTICE Damage to the HMI device Only connect the HMI device to public Ethernet networks using a switch or comparable device PROFINET IO communication For instructions regarding the installation of PROFINET networks please refer to the PROFINET system description manual Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO 63 Installation and connection 4 4 Connecting the connection box 4 4 7 Connecting a Configuring PC Introduction Standard cables are available for the connections shown For additional information refer to the Internet at http mall automation siemens com Configuration diagram The following figure shows the connection between a connection box and a configuring PC via PROFIBUS DP a PC 1 When operated on port IF1 RS 232 and RS 422 485 may only be connected alternatively IF1 is located on terminal strip 1 of the connection box DP PROFIBUS DP Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 64 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Installation and connection 4 4 Connecting the connection box The following figure shows the connection between a connection box and a configuring PC via PROFINET ie PC Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO 65 Installation and connecti
175. e The correct port is used e Your configuration is OK port parameters protocol settings PLC address Restart the system if the system alarm persists 220008 The communication driver cannot access or open Close all the applications which access this port and restart the computer Use another port of the system 230000 View alarms Number 230000 Effect causes The value entered could not be accepted The system discards the entry and restores the previous value Either e The value range has been exceeded e Illegal characters have been entered e The maximum permitted number of users has been exceeded Remedy Enter a practical value or delete any unneeded users 230002 The currently logged in user has not the required authorization The system therefore discards the input and restored the previous value Log on as a user with appropriate authorization 230003 Changeover to the specified screen failed because the screen is not available configured The current screen remains selected Configure the screen and check the screen selection function 230005 The value range of the tag has been exceeded in the I O field The original value of the tag is retained Observe the range of values for the tag when entering a value 230100 During navigation in the web browser the system returned a message which may be of interest to the user The web browser continues to run but may not
176. e adjusted i _ Memory Allocated 5128 A gcated 95584KB In Use 80KB In Use 9936KB 2 Close the dialog 6 6 Setting the Delay Time Introduction The project is opened following a delay time when the HMI device is switched on The Loader is displayed during the delay time Requirements You have opened the Directories tab in the Transfer Settings dialog box by pressing the SD Transfer t icon Transfer Settings Channel Directories Project File Flash simatic Project Backup Autostart application Path Flash Simatic HmiR Tm exe Directory where the project file is saved Directory where the compressed source file of your project is saved The external memory card or the network connection can be defined as the storage location During the next backup process the project s source file is stored in the specified location Storage location and initialization file of the HMI device for process operation Region selection box Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 141 Configuring the operating system 6 6 Setting the Delay Time NOTICE Settings in Project File and Path Do not change the setting in the Project File and Path fields The project may not open at the next start of the HMI device if changes are made here Procedure for setting the delay time 1 Select the des
177. e causes e An error occurred while transferring the recipes e The recipe structure was changed in ES When the project was downloaded again the recipes were not transferred with it This means that the new configuration data is not being transferred to the old recipes on the device the recipes the corresponding check box in the Transfer dialog must be checked 300000 Alarm_S alarms Number 300000 Effect causes Faulty configuration of process monitoring e g using PDiag or S7 Graph More alarms are queued than specified in the specifications of the CPU No further ALARM_S alarms can be managed by the PLC and reported to the HMI devices Remedy Change the PLC configuration 300001 ALARM_S is not registered on this PLC Select a controller that supports the ALARM_S service 310000 Report system alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 310000 An attempt is being made to print too many reports Wait until the previous active log was printed in parallel Repeat the print job if necessary Only one log file can be output to the printer at a given time the print job is therefore rejected 310001 An error occurred on triggering the printer The Evaluate the additional system alarms related to this report is either not printed or printed with errors alarm Repeat the print job if necessary 320000 Alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 320000 The movem
178. e desired recipe data record Enter the values of the elements Save the recipe data record The recipe data record is saved in the internal memory of the HMI device The following figure shows the data flow schematically O00000 HMI device Recipe view 1 i A 4 gt Recipe tag Recipe screen 4 A Display recipe data record Save recipe data record Tags are synchronized Display and edit recipe tags in the recipe screen Tags are offline Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 253 Operating recipes 10 10 Examples 10 10 2 Manual production sequence Introduction You request the production data of different workpieces from the PLC and display this data on the screen of the HMI device for inspection You want to correct the transferred production data in the recipe view or the recipe screen if necessary Procedure A scanner connected to the PLC reads the barcode of a workpiece The barcode names correspond to the names in the recipe data record Based on the barcode name the PLC can read the required recipe data record The recipe data record is displayed for inspection on the HMI device You can now edit and save the recipe data record Then transfer the edited recipe data record to the PLC again The following figure shows the data flow schematically HMI device Recipe view 4 a ecipe n 1 Oi ecipe j screen
179. e emergency STOP button can be impaired Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 110 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Operator controls and displays 5 7 Connection box 5 7 Connection box 5 7 1 STOP button on the connection box Plus Introduction A connection box Plus differs from a connection box Basic in that it has four relays mounted on the board Connection box DP Board Relays Connection box PN Switching states of the Stop or Emergency Stop circuit with connection box Plus The Stop or Emergency Stop circuit switching statuses for a connected Mobile Panel 277 with a STOP button and connection box Plus are Mobile Panel 277 STOP button Status of the Stop or Emergency Stop circuit Is connected Not pressed The Stop or Emergency Stop circuit remains closed Is connected Pressed The Stop or Emergency Stop circuit is open The system being monitored is shut down Is not connected The Stop or Emergency Stop circuit remains closed Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 111 Operator controls and displays 5 7 Connection box 5 7 2 Introduction 112 The Stop or Emergency Stop circuit switching statuses for a connected Mobile Panel 277 without a STOP button and connection box Plus are Mobile Panel 277 STOP button Status of the Stop or Emergency Stop circuit Is connected Not available The Stop or
180. e has been exceeded or has not been reached The gauge is a dynamic display object The gauge displays numerical values in analog form by means of a pointer This enables an operator at the HMI device to see at a glance if the boiler pressure is in the normal range for example The layout of the gauge depends on the configuration e A trailing pointer can display the maximum value reached so far on the scale The trailing pointer is reset when the screen is reloaded e The label on the scale can show the measured variable for example boiler pressure and the physical unit for example bar The bar and the gauge are for display only Both objects cannot be controlled by the operator Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO Operating a project 8 7 Introduction Layout Procedure Result 8 7 Operating the switch Operating the switch The switch is an operating element and display object with two predefined switching states for example On and Off Switches can signalize the state of a plant section for example if a motor is running or not At the same time you can use the switch to change the state of the corresponding plant section via the HMI device for example from On to Off The layout of the switch depends on the configuration Switch with slider The two states are displayed by the position of the slider Slider Switch with text or graphic
181. e network group Specify the address of the proxy server and the port Note The proxy settings in the Control Panel apply to all applications that are running on the HMI device The Pocket Internet Explorer requires independent proxy settings that you must specify in the properties of the Pocket Internet Explorer See chapter Loader Page 115 If you want to bypass the proxy server for local addresses activate the Bypass proxy server for local addresses checkbox Confirm your entries The dialog closes 6 8 6 3 Changing Privacy Settings Cookies and encryption Cookies are pieces of information sent by a web server to a browser In the event of subsequent access to the web server the cookies are sent back This enables information to be stored between the accesses Requirements In order to ensure a high level of privacy data are sent via the Internet in encrypted form Common encryption protocols include SSL and TLS You can activate or deactivate the usage of encryption protocols The required settings can be obtained from your network administrator You have opened the Privacy tab in the Internet Options dialog box by pressing the Internet Options Picon Internet Options General Connection Privacy Advanced Third party Cookies Accept Block Prompt Prompt M Always allow session cookies Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instru
182. e on the battery The rechargeable battery is available under the order number 6AV667 1 5AD00 0AX0 1 4 4 Wall holder The wall holder provides a safe hold for the Mobile Panel 277 when used in stationary mode Hook for the grip on the HMI device Screw flange The wall holder is not included with the HMI device The wall holder is available with order number 6AV6574 1AF04 4AA0 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0AB0O 25 Overview 1 4 Accessories 1 4 5 PC PPI cable You need the cable to update the HMI device image via the RS 232 serial interface of the configuration PC You can also use the cable for data transfer Connect the PC PPI cable to the RS 485 port of the HMI device Note If the connection fails during the operating system update set the system to a lower bit rate If you use a higher bit rate you must use the PC PPI cable release 3 or higher The version code is printed on the cable e g E Stand 3 corresponds to version 3 The PC PPI cable is not included with the HMI device The cable is available with order number 6ES7 901 3CB30 0XA0 1 4 6 USB PPI cable You need the cable to update the operating system by resetting to factory settings via the USB port of the configuration PC Connect the PC PPI cable to the RS 485 port of the HMI device Note Use a USB PPI cable version 5 or higher The version code is printed on the cable for
183. e operating system Serial with reset to factory settings 2 Yes Serial Yes MPI PROFIBUS DP Yes USB Yes Ethernet Yes Transferring a project Serial Yes MPI PROFIBUS DP Yes USB Yes Ethernet Yes Installing or removing an option Serial 1 Yes MPI PROFIBUS DP Yes USB Yes Ethernet Yes Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 167 Commissioning a project 7 5 Transfer Type Data channel Mobile Panel 277 License key transferring or Serial Yes transferring back MPI PROFIBUS DP Yes USB Yes Ethernet Yes 1 Applies when PC PPI cable is used 2 Applies when the USB PPI cable is used 7 5 Transfer 7 5 1 Overview Transfer Transfer the executable project from the configuring PC to the HMI device You can start the Transfer mode manually or automatically on the HMI device Transferred data is written directly to the internal flash memory on the HMI device For the transfer you use a data channel which you have to configure before starting a transfer Backtransfer You have the option to transfer the compressed project file together with the runtime project to the HMI device If necessary the compressed project file can be transferred back to the configuring PC and edited The HMI device must be equipped with an external memory card to which the compressed project file can be saved NOTICE Compressed project file WinCC flexible does not chec
184. e project has been transferred to the HMI device e The HMI device is in Offline mode In Offline mode you can test individual project functions on the HMI device without them being affected by the PLC PLC tags therefore are not updated Test the operating elements and visualization of the project as far as possible without connecting to the PLC Requirements for online testing Procedure See also e The project has been transferred to the HMI device e The HMI device is in Online mode In Online mode you can test individual project functions on the HMI device without them being affected by the PLC PLC tags are updated in this case You have the option to test all communication dependent functions for example alarms etc Test the operating elements and views of the project Operating modes Page 166 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 173 Commissioning a project 7 6 Backup and restore 7 6 Backup and restore 7 6 1 Overview Backup and restore NOTICE License keys License keys are not taken into account for backups and restores License keys are saved in the working memory of the HMI device and cannot be deleted You can back up and restore the following data found in the internal flash memory of the HMI device with a PC e Project and HMI device image e Password list e Recipe data Use one of the following tools for backup an
185. e sent for unknown reasons Check the e mail parameters recipient etc The contents of the e mail are lost 70038 The SMTP server has rejected sending or Check the domain of the recipient address or disable forwarding an e mail because the domain of the the authentication on the SMTP server if possible recipient is unknown to the server or because the SMTP authentication is currently not used in WinCC SMTP server requires authentication flexible Runtime The contents of the e mail are lost 70039 The syntax of the e mail address is incorrect or Check the e mail address of the recipient contains illegal characters The contents of the e mail are discarded 70040 The syntax of the e mail address is incorrect or contains illegal characters 70041 The import of the user management was aborted Check your user management or transfer it again to due to an error Nothing was imported the panel Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO 291 Appendix A 2 System alarms while executing the system function The system function calculation has not been carried out Number Effect causes Remedy 70042 The value range for the tags has been exceeded Check the desired calculation and correct it if while executing the system function necessary The system function calculation has not been carried out 70043 The value range for the tags has been exceeded Ch
186. e to restrict access to the transfer settings and thus avoid unauthorized modifications Requirements e The project hmi is opened in WinCC flexible e The HMI device is connected to a configuring PC e The data channel is configured on the HMI device e The automatic transfer is activated in the data channel for the transfer e The project is started on the HMI device Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 170 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Commissioning a project 7 5 Transfer Proceed as follows On the configuring PC select the Transfer settings command in the menu Project gt Transfer in WinCC flexible The Select devices for transfer dialog opens Select the HMI device in the left area of the dialog Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the configuring PC Set the connection parameters Set the transfer parameters in the right area of the dialog If you wish to transfer the compressed project file together with the runtime project to the HMI device Select the Enable backtransfer check box Start transfer in WinCC flexible with Transfer The configuring PC checks the connection to the HMI device The HMI device shuts down the current project and automatically switches to Transfer mode The project is transferred to the HMI device If the connection is not available or is defective an error message is displayed on the configuring PC When the t
187. ecipe view 10 7 1 Overview Introduction The simple recipe view consists of three areas e Recipe list e Record list e Element list You can use the context menu to operate each of these display areas Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 244 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Operating recipes 10 7 Operating the simple recipe view Operation The simple recipe view can be operated as follows e Enter values for the recipe elements e Create recipe data records e Save recipe data records or save them under a new name e Delete recipe data records e Transfer recipe data records from the PLC and to the PLC Operator controls of the simple recipe view Toggle between the display areas and the context menus to operate the simple recipe views The table below shows the operation of the display area Operation Functions Touching an entry The next lower display area opens lt The next higher display area opens gt The context menu of the display area opens The table below shows the operation of the context menu Operation Functions The menu is closed The display area opens Touch the menu command The menu command is executed Context menus of the simple recipe view e Recipe list No Menu command Functions 0 New A new recipe data record is created for the selected recipe If a start value is configured it is shown in the input field Displaying
188. eck box Color if you wish to print in color 8 Confirm your entries The dialog closes The settings for the printer have now been changed Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 137 Configuring the operating system 6 5 Changing HMI device settings 6 5 7 Restarting the HMI Device Introduction The HMI device must be restarted in the following cases e You have activated or deactivated the PROFINET IO direct keys e You have changed the time zone setting e You have changed the automatic daylight savings and standard setting caution Data loss when the HMI device is restarted All volatile data is lost when the HMI device is rebooted Check the following e The project on the HMI device is not open e No data is being written to the flash memory Requirements You have opened the OP Properties dialog box by pressing the OP icon Procedure 1 Change to the Device tab in the OP Properties dialog 2 Press Reboot to restart the HMI device A warning is displayed The HMI device reboots immediately if you confirm this warning Result The HMI device starts See also Setting the date and time Page 129 Enabling PROFINET IO Page 148 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 138 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Contiguring the operating system 6 5 8 Displaying Information about the HMI Device Introduction Requirements
189. eck the desired calculation and correct it if necessary 80000 Archive alarms Number 80001 Effect causes The log specified is filled to the size defined in percent and must be stored elsewhere Remedy Store the file or table by executing a move or copy function 80002 A line is missing in the specified log 80003 The copying process for logging was not successful In this case it is advisable to check any subsequent system alarms too 80006 Since logging is not possible this causes a permanent loss of the functionality In the case of databases check whether the corresponding data source exists and start up the system again 80009 A copying action has been completed successfully 80010 Since the storage location was incorrectly entered in WinCC flexible this causes a permanent loss of the functionality Configure the storage location for the respective log again and restart the system when the full functionality is required 80012 Log entries are stored in a buffer If the values are read to the buffer faster than they can be physically written using a hard disk for example overloading may occur and recording is then stopped Archive fewer values Or Increase the logging cycle 80013 The overload status no longer applies Archiving resumes the recording of all values 80014 The same action was triggered twice in quick succ
190. ed memory in percent Control box for activation of memory management Proceed as follows 1 In order to start memory management activate the control box 2 Confirm your entries The dialog closes Memory management is activated Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Commissioning a project A 7 1 Overview Configuration and process control phase HMI devices can be used to operate and monitor tasks in process and production automation The plant screens on the HMI devices are used to provide a clearer overview of active processes The HMI device project which includes the plant screens is created during the configuration phase Once the project is transferred to the HMI device current processes can be operated and monitored in the process control phase The HMI device is connected to a PLC in the plant and exchanges values with this PLC Configuration phase Configuration PC Seine Test the project Simulate the project HMI device dependent Save the project Transfer the project Process control phase HMI device Operate the project Connection to the PLC 1 PLC Transferring the project to the HMI device You can transfer a project to an HMI device as follows e Transfer from the configuring PC e Restore from a PC using ProSave In this case an archived project is transferred from a PC to the HMI device The configuration software nee
191. ed on the HMI device wiew Tools f alesis address windows default Welcome to Microsoft Pocket Internet Explorer 2004 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved Terms of use Note The Pocket Internet Explorer and the PC version of the Internet Explorer differ in terms of functional range For further information please refer to Microsoft s website Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO 117 Configuring the operating system 6 2 Control Panel 6 2 Control Panel 6 2 1 Overview Control Panel of the HMI device Certificates Backup R InputPanel 3 amp Network ID OP Printer Call Transfer ba Wincc Intern le System ee 9 amp Internet Keyboard Options PROFINET Regional s Settings 2 x 5 Mouse Dial up Co oH B S Transfer ScreenSaver Settings Network and The HMI device Control Panel can be used to modify the following HMI device settings e Date time e Screen saver e Regional settings e Transfer settings e Network settings e Delay time e Password Opening the Control Panel The Control Panel can be opened as follows 118 e Inthe startup phase Press Control Panel to open the HMI device Control Panel in the loader e In a running project Operate the control object provided for the respective task if configured Alternatively you can open the Con
192. ed the start value The alarm can be entered in the alarm buffer for up to four more failed tags if necessary After that alarm 290003 is output Remedy Check in the configuration that the address has been set up in the PLC 290001 An attempt has been made to assign a value to a recipe tag which is outside the value range permitted for this type The alarm can be entered in the alarm buffer for up to four more failed tags if necessary After that alarm 290004 is output Observe the value range for the tag type 290002 It is not possible to convert a value from a source format to a target format The alarm can be entered in the alarm buffer for up to four more failed recipe tags if necessary After that alarm 290005 is output Check the value range or type of the tag 290003 This alarm is output when alarm number 290000 is triggered more than five times In this case no further separate alarms are generated Check in the configuration that the tag addresses have been set up in the PLC 290004 This alarm is output when alarm number 290001 is triggered more than five times In this case no further separate alarms are generated Observe the value range for the tag type 310 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0AB0 Appendix A 2 System alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 290005 This ala
193. ee Touch pens Page 26 EOOOLO 1 3 Accessory kit for Mobile Panel 277 8 The accessory kit is supplied with the HMI device The accessory kit contains the following e Cover cap with rubber seal e Screws for fixing the cover cap e Label for cover cap The accessory kit can include documents Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 20 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Overview 1 4 Accessories 1 4 Accessories 1 4 1 Connecting Cable The connecting cable is an industrial cable and thus resistant to many solvents and lubricants The flexural strength of the connecting cable is geared to the actual usage conditions The connecting cable is available in two models e Connecting cable DP For connecting the Mobile Panel 277 to the connection box DP e Connecting cable PN For connecting the Mobile Panel 277 to the connection box PN able available in different lengths For additional information refer to ttp jimall automation siemens com The connecting the Internet at Design of the connecting cable The following figure shows the connecting cable DP Metallic push pull circular connector Strain relief and antikink device for the connection cable RJ45 connector OOO Plug connector 10 pin Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0AB0O 21 Overview 7 4 Accessories The following figure shows the connecting cable PN a
194. ee also EN 60204 1997 chapter 9 2 5 3 The stop function is not to be used as a replacement for safety equipment Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Safety instructions and general notes 2 9 Electromagnetic Compatibility NOTICE Connection boxes in a system Install connection boxes of only one variant in other words only connection box Plus or connection box Basic Mobile Panel 277 connected If the Mobile Panel 277 is connected to the connection box the STOP button on the Mobile Panel 277 can trip if it falls thus causing the system to come to a standstill STOP button on the connection box Plus Page 111 STOP button on the connection box Basic Page 112 Electromagnetic Compatibility The HMI device satisfies among other things the requirements of the EMC laws pertaining to the European domestic market EMC compliant installation The EMC compliant installation of the connection box and the application of interference proof cable is the basis for interference free operation The Guidelines for interference free installation of PLCs description and the PROFIBUS Networks manual also apply to the installation of connection boxes Pulse shaped interference The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of modules with regard to pulse shaped interference This requires the HMI device to meet the specifications and direct
195. en Screen object STEP 7 Form of the visualization of all logically related process data for a plant The visualization of the process data can be supported by graphic objects Configured object used to display or operate the plant e g rectangle I O field or alarm view STEP 7 is the programming software for SIMATIC S7 SIMATIC C7 and SIMATIC WinAC PLCs STEP 7 Micro WIN STEP 7 Micro WIN is the programming software for SIMATIC S7 200 PLCs Symbolic I O field System alarm Tab sequence Tag Transfer Transfer mode A symbolic I O field is a field for the input and output of the value Contains a list of default entries from which one can be selected A system alarm is assigned to the System alarm class A system alarm refers to internal states on the HMI device and the PLC During configuration this defines the sequence in which objects are activated on pressing the lt TAB gt key Defined memory location to which values can be written to and read from This can be done from the PLC or the HMI device Based on whether the tag is interconnected with the PLC or not we distinguish between external tags process tags and internal tags Transfer of a runtime project from the configuring PC to the HMI device An operating mode of the HMI device in which an executable project is transferred from the configuring PC to an HMI device Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691
196. en the two The enabling buttons meet the requirements of Safety Category 3 to EN 954 1 when used in combination with an external monitoring device Circuit diagram The figure below shows the switch settings and interconnections of the enabling button Enabling button left Enabling button right 3 level 2 circuit 3 level 2 circuit 123 321 oo Circuit 1 oo ae aN See i E a ae F 123 trawl 321 a pie eo ee ead e i Evaluation circuit 4 i ZX Circuit 1 ZX Circuit 2 Connecting cables Connection box Plus or connection box Basic ENABLE 1 Terminal strip 2 Switch settings The primary function of the evaluation logic is to detect the three switch settings Switch setting Function Enabling button Switch state Neutral position not activated OFF open Enable activated ON closed 3 Panic pressed OFF open Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 102 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Operator controls and displays 5 3 Operator controls of Mobile Panel 277 10 Enabling button left Enabling button right 3 level 2 circuit 3 level 2 circuit 123 321 The following figure shows the switching sequence for normal activation Neutral position 1 gt Enable 2 w gt Neutral position 1 Switch setting 1 2 3 ZT left ZT right ZT left ZT right ZT Enabling button The following figure shows the switching sequence for panic activation Neutra
197. ents have already been indicated by Deselect the movements on the other display units and another device select the motion control screen on the required The movements can no longer be controlled display unit Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 314 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Appendix A 2 System alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 320001 The network is too complex View the network in STL The faulty addresses cannot be indicated 320002 No diagnosable alarm message error selected Select a diagnostics alarm from the ZP_ALARM alarm The unit associated with the alarm message could screen not be selected 320003 No alarm message error exists for the selected Select the defective unit from the overview screen unit The detail view cannot visualize any networks 320004 The required signal states could not be read by the Check the consistency between the configuration on PLC The faulty addresses cannot be found the display unit and the PLC program 320005 The project contains ProAgent elements which are In order to run the project install the optional ProAgent not installed ProAgent diagnostic functions cannot package be performed 320006 You have attempted to execute a function which is Check the type of the selected unit not supported in the current constellation 320007 No error triggering addresses were found on the Switch the detail screen to STL layout mode and che
198. enu Operating 246 Recipe screen Operating Overview Recipe tag Offline 238 Online 238 Synchronizing 237 242 Recipe view Expanded 2 Menu commands Operator control Operator controls 24 Simple 2 Recommissioning Record list 2 Recovery time 73 is 268 peel ed Regional and ls settings 119 134 Regional settings Registered rater Registry eee Backing up 1 Regulations for the Te tion of accidents Remote control Forcing permission 211 Start Removing Option 167 182 183 Repairs 2 Replacement key set Replugging Mobile Panel 2 Reset to factory settings 16 Restore te hra Restoring 167 174 176 177 213 From memory card 119 132 160 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0AB0 Index With ProSave With WinCC flexible Return Center Reuse Project 167 Reverse ond a Risk analysis 3 Risk evaluation Special operation Risk from improper use Enabling button RJ45 socket Safety instruction Rotary encoder switch RS 485 port Pin assignment Ruler Trend view S S7 transfer settings Safety Functional scope 29 Standards 36 38 Safety category 3 Connection example Safety circuit device SIRIUS 3TK2822 284 SIRIUS 3TK2841 284 Safety instruction Backlighting Category 0 Stop 40 84 Category 1 Stop 40 84 Changed tag name 242 Cold restart Compatibility conflict Compressed project file
199. equence 1 Place the USB socket in the other cable inlet if necessary 2 Plug in the connecting cable 3 Connect the connector for the power supply 4 Connect the connector for the data communication Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0AB0 73 Installation and connection 4 5 Connecting Mobile Panel 277 4 5 4 Requirements Connecting a Configuring PC e The Mobile Panel 277 is connected to the connection box e Rule for the connection via RS 485 The cover of the terminal compartment on the Mobile Panel 277 is removed NOTICE Degree of protection IP65 not met It is not possible to fasten the cover of the connection box if a configuration PC is connected directly to Mobile Panel 277 via RS 485 Only connect a configuration PC directly with Mobile Panel 277 if ambient conditions do not demand the degree of protection IP65 Configuration diagram 74 The following figure shows the connection of the HMI device with a configuration PC via RS 485 and USB The following data can be exchanged between the HMI device and a configuration PC e Project e HMI device image If there is no operable HMI device image on the HMI device or none at all you can update the operating tem by restoring the factory settings See chapter Reset to factory settings Page 179 Use only the original PC PPI cable for the update e Additional project data YOR F
200. er by external sources Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO Appendix A 2 System alarms 170000 S7 dialog alarms Number 170000 Effect causes S7 diagnostics events are not indicated because it is not possible to log on to the S7 diagnostics functions at this device The service is not supported Remedy 170001 The S7 diagnostics buffer cannot be viewed because communication with the PLC is shut down Set the PLC to online mode 170002 The S7 diagnostics buffer cannot be viewed because reading of the diagnostics buffer SSL was canceled with error 170003 An S7 diagnostics event cannot be visualized The system returns internal error 2 170004 An S7 diagnostics event cannot be visualized The system returns an internal error of error class 2 error number 3 170007 It is not possible to read the S7 diagnostics buffer SSL because this operation was canceled with an internal error of class 2 and error code 3 180000 Misc common alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 180000 A component OCX received configuration data with Install a newer component a version ID which is not supported 180001 System overload because too many actions Several remedies are available running in parallel Not all the actions can be e Generate the alarms at a slower rate polling executed some are rejected e Init
201. er consumption connection box DP without mobile panel e Typical e Approx 100 mA e Constant current maximum e Approx 150 mA e Power on current surge It e Approx 0 5 A s Power consumption connection box DP with mobile panel e Typical e Approx 600 mA e Constant current maximum e Approx 750 mA e Power on current surge l t e Approx 0 6 A2s Enabling button e Connection voltage e 24VDC e Amperage max e 400 mA Amperage min e 10mA Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 267 Technical specifications 12 2 Specifications 12 2 5 Weight Supply voltage 268 STOP button optional e Connection voltage e 24VDC e Amperage max e 500 mA e Amperage min e 10mA Fuse internal Electronic Current load PLC accompanying signals Max 100 mA Recovery time After 1s Note Recovery time Wait for approximately one second after you have removed the connecting cable from the connection box before you plug the connecting cable back into the connection box Power failure It is necessary to remove and replace the connection cable in the event of power failures lasting less than a second in order to eliminate possible malfunctions Connection box PN Weight without packing Approx 700 g Nominal voltage Range permissible 24 VDC 20 4 to 28 8 V 15 20 Transients maximum permissible
202. er once again Obtain a network printer network printer authorization Power supply failure during data transfer If the error persists contact the Hotline 10001 No printer is installed or a default printer has not Install a printer and or select it as the default printer been set up 10002 Overflow of the graphics buffer for printing Up to Allow sufficient intervals between successive print jobs two images are buffered 10003 Images can now be buffered again 10004 Overflow of the buffer for printing lines in text mode Allow sufficient intervals between successive print jobs e g alarms Up to 1000 lines are buffered 10005 Text lines can now be buffered again 10006 The Windows printing system reports an error Repeat the action if necessary Refer to the output text and the error ID to determine the possible causes Nothing is printed or the print is faulty Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0AB0 287 Appendix A 2 System alarms 20000 Global script alarms in short intervals When more than 20 scripts are queued for processing any subsequent scripts are rejected In this case the script indicated in the alarm is not executed Number Effect causes Remedy 20010 An error has occurred in the specified script line Select the specified script line in the configuration Execution of the script was therefore aborted Note Ensure
203. er the same functions They differ only in the display of information Simple user view If you are not logged on to the HMI device the only entry contained in the simple user view is lt ENTER gt If you are logged on to the HMI device the simple user view only displays the user name and user group Group 9 PLC User Group 1 User 1 Group 1 lt New user gt Extended user view The extended user view displays information about the users User b Password Group Logoff time Group 9 The extended user view contains the following columns e Users e Password e Group e Logoff time The passwords are encrypted by appearing as asterisks Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 214 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Operating a project 8 12 Project security 8 12 3 User logon Logon dialog Use the logon dialog to log on to the security system of the HMI device Enter your user name and password in the logon dialog x User Password OK Cancel The logon dialog opens in the following cases e You are operating an operator control with password protection e You are operating an operator control that was configured for displaying the logon dialog e Activate the lt ENTER gt entry in the simple user view e Activate a blank entry in the extended user view e The logon dialog will be automatically displayed when the project is started depending on the configuration
204. er to control the integrated LEDs The following figure shows the assignment of tags using an illuminated pushbutton as example Tag status_Control_Element LED tag LeD_vaR gt Bit fo 5 For locally allocated handwheel In the Screens editor open the screen to which you want to assign the local handwheel function Configure the function ConnectTagWithHandwheel on a command button or directly into the screen structure Select the Status_Operator_Control tag as Value The value is written to the Status_Operator_Control tag after you have activated the operator control The Control_Element_PLC tag writes the value of the Status_Control_Element tags into the PLC The SetValue system function has to configured at the Status_Control_Element tag in order for the value to be transferred 6 Open the properties window of the Status_Control_Element tag Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 321 Appendix A 3 Things to remember during configuration 7 Click Change value in the properties view of the Status_Control_Element tag in the Events group The Function list dialog box opens 8 Click the first line of the function list The list opens showing the system functions available in the project 9 Select the SetValue system function from the Calculation group 10 Select the Operator_Control_PLC tag at Tag output 11
205. eration Procedure for changing e mail settings Proceed as follows 1 Specify the SMTP server Activate the Use the default of the project file radio button if you want to use the SMTP server configured in the project Deactivate the Use the default of the project file radio button if you do not want to use the SMTP server configured in the project Specify the required SMTP server 2 Enter the name for the sender in the Sender text box 3 Enter the e mail account for your e mail in the Authentication text box Some e mail providers only allow you to send mail if you specify the e mail account The Authentication text box can remain empty if your e mail provider allows you to send mail without checking the account 4 Confirm your entries The dialog closes Result The e mail settings have been changed See also Overview of network operation Page 149 6 8 6 Changing internet settings 6 8 6 1 Changing General Internet Settings Requirements You have opened the General tab in the Internet Options dialog box by pressing the Internet Options y icon Internet Options General Connection Privacy Advanced Start Page Inttp www siemens com automation Search Page frttp wiww siemens com automation service User Agent requires browser restart Default Windows CE v Cache Size in KB 512 Clear Cache Clear History Mobile Panel 277 WinCC fle
206. ergency Stop circuit of the system or machine is looped through the connection box Plus and is not interrupted This is independent of whether the Mobile Panel 277 is connected to the connection box or not and STOP button not activated This functionality is only available in the connection box Plus A WARNING Mobile Panel 277 with STOP button If the Mobile Panel 277 is equipped with a STOP button and is not connected to the connection box a Stop cannot be initiated using the Mobile Panel 277 The STOP button of the Mobile Panel 277 is then ineffective Install stationary Emergency Stop buttons that are available at all times on the system being monitored Category 0 or 1 Stop If a Category 0 or 1 Stop circuit is implemented the stop function must be in effect regardless of the operating mode A Category 0 Stop must have precedence Releasing the STOP button must not initiate any dangerous state see also EN 60204 1 1997 chapter 9 2 5 3 The stop function is not to be used as a replacement for safety equipment Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 100 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Operator controls and displays 5 3 2 Introduction Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 5 3 Operator controls of Mobile Panel 277 10 NOTICE Several connection boxes Install only one type of connection box i e connection box Plus or connection box Basic for monitoring your system STOP
207. ergency Stop circuit when the system to be monitored has no option for a fast process stop Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Operator controls and displays 5 2 Operator controls of Mobile Panel 277 8 The following figure shows the position of the STOP button taking the example of Mobile Panel 277 8 SIEMENS WAS ere o DO Fall protection STOP button Due to its position the STOP button is equally accessible to both left handed and right handed individuals Due to its profiled design the STOP button is easily accessible Mobile Panel 277 8 is equipped with a collar type edge to provide fall protection This feature protects the STOP button without preventing its triggering in case a user unintentionally drops the HMI device Operation The STOP button is operated by pressing the button Once the stop operation has been initiated the STOP button remains engaged in the stop position Note The STOP button engages when activated Releasing the STOP button A WARNING If you have activated the STOP button and thereby brought the monitored system to a standstill the STOP button may only be released under the following conditions e The reasons for the stop have been eliminated e A safe restart is possible In order to release the STOP button turn it in a clockwise direction The STOP button then returns on its own to the starting p
208. ernet AIrrent printe ana required ng or N Qe e under http support automation siemens com WW view en 11376409 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0AB0 Contiguring the operating system Requirements Procedure Result 6 5 Changing HMI device settings On You have opened the Printer Properties dialog box by pressing the Printer lt icon Printer Properties OK Printer Language Epsons l Port Network 342 Network server32 printerol gt 3 Paper Size a4 a Orientation P ol Portrait O Landscape n 6 c Draft Mode E Color Printer selection field Interface Network address of the printer Paper size selection field Orientation setting C0000 Print quality setting Proceed as follows 1 Select the printer in the Printer Language selection field From the Port selection field select the Network interface Enter in the field Network the network address of the printer Select the paper format in the Paper Size selection field a A WwW N Activate the required radio button in the Orientation group Portrait for vertical format Landscape for horizontal format 6 Select the print quality Select the check box Draft Mode if you wish to print a draft Deactivate the check box Draft Mode if you wish to print with higher quality 7 Set the color mode Select the ch
209. erty damage can result if proper precautions are not taken NOTICE indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into account If more than one degree of danger is present the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage Qualified Personnel The device system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation Commissioning and operation of a device system may only be performed by qualified personnel Within the context of the safety notes in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission ground and label devices systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards Proper use of Siemens products Trademarks Note the following A WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation If products and components from other manufacturers are used these must be recommended or approved by Siemens Proper transport storage installation assembly commissioning operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems The permissible ambient conditions must be adhered to The information in the
210. es are changed in the PLC the changed values are displayed immediately in the recipe screen Tags offline With this setting changed recipe values are not synchronized immediately between the HMI device and the PLC In this case the configuration engineer must configure operating elements for transferring the values to the PLC or reading them from the PLC in a recipe screen The recipe values are only synchronized between HMI device and PLC when you operate the appropriate operating element 10 6 Operating the recipe view 10 6 1 Overview Operation The recipe view can be operated as follows 238 Enter values for the recipe elements Create recipe data records Save recipe data records or save them under a new name Delete recipe data records Synchronize values of the recipe view with the associated recipe tags Transfer recipe data records from the PLC and to the PLC Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0AB0 Operating recipes 10 6 Operating the recipe view Operator controls of the recipe view The following table shows the operator controls of the recipe view Buttons Functions Creates a new recipe data record If a start value is configured it is shown in the text box Saves the displayed values of the recipe data record The storage location is predefined by the project The recipe data record is saved under a different name irrespective of the reci
211. essary established 70032 The object configured with this number in the tab Check the number of the tab order and correct it if order is not available in the selected screen necessary The screen changes but the focus is set to the first object 70033 An e mail cannot be sent because a TCP IP Check the network connection to the SMTP server and connection to the SMTP server no longer exists re establish it if necessary This system alarm is generated only at the first attempt All subsequent unsuccessful attempts to send an e mail will no longer generate a system alarm The event is regenerated when an e mail has been successfully sent in the meantime The central e mail component in WinCC flexible Runtime attempts in regular intervals 1 minute to establish the connection to the SMTP server and to send the remaining e mails 70034 Following a disruption the TCP IP connection to the SMTP server could be re established The queued e mails are then sent 70036 No SMTP server for sending e mails is configured Configure an SMTP server An attempt to connect to an SMTP server has In WinCC flexible Engineering System failed and it is not possible to send e mails using Device settings gt Device settings WinCC flexible Runtime generates the system alarm after the first attempt to send an e mail in He dey CE operating system using Control Panel gt Internet Settings gt E mail gt SMTP Server 70037 An e mail cannot b
212. ession Since the process is already in operation the action is only carried out once 80015 This system alarm is used to report DOS or database errors to the user 80016 The logs are separated by the system function CloseAllLogs and the incoming entries exceed the defined buffer size All entries in the buffer are deleted Reconnect the logs 80017 The number of incoming events cause a buffer overflow This can be caused for example by several copying actions being activated at the same time All copy jobs are deleted Stop the copy action 292 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO Appendix A 2 System alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 80019 The connection between WinCC flexible and all logs were closed for example after executing the system function CloseAllLogs Entries are written to the buffer and are then written to the logs when a connection is re established There is no connection to the storage location and the storage medium may be replaced for example 80020 The maximum number of simultaneously copy Wait until the current copying actions have been operations has been exceeded Copying is not completed then restart the last copy action executed 80021 An attempt was made to delete a log which is still Wait until the current copying actions have been busy with a copy ac
213. etting Touch screen calibration Yes Brightness setting Yes Language change Number of languages 16 VBScript User specific extension of the functionality Yes Number of scripts 50 Graphic object Vector and pixel graphics Yes Trends Number 300 Task planner Number of tasks 48 Text objects Number 10 000 Direct keys PROFIBUS DP direct keys Yes PROFINET IO direct keys Yes Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO 29 Overview 1 6 Software Options 1 6 Software Options The following software options are available for the Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Sm rtService The WinCC flexible Sm rtService option lets you to access a remote HMI device from your HMI device or PC via Ethernet e WinCC Flexible Sm rtAccess The WinCC flexible Sm rtAccess option can be used to implement communication between different HMI systems e WinCC flexible Audit The WinCC flexible Audit option enhances functionality of the HMI device with functionality for recording operator actions in an audit trail and electronic signatures e WinCC flexible OPC server OPC XML The WinCC flexible OPC server option lets you set up the communication with OPC compatible applications from an HMI device or PC via Ethernet 1 7 Communications Number of connections Connection Mobile Panel 277 Number using a bus connection 6 Number of connections based on 8 SIMATIC HMI HTTP Protocol
214. evice ee ecce cee cence eeenneeeeeeaeeeeesaaeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeeeaeeeeseteeees COV EIVIOW gcse cece A E E A A ve cea vveaadhvv esta cide aati ave suai E eee anes Mobile Panel 27 0 8 tecsvcascccssaatexis5aceneszaandegia da tan cece dean dvdleas dvs ca agctvcsacdveiusaddsiayaedeysangadentagauagtewendanae lt s Mobile Panel 277 10 asuisin ine aandie aaia aaa aa aa aiaiai 8 Operator controls of Mobile Panel 277 8 ccccccccscccceeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeceneeeeeeeeseeeceeeeeeeseteesneeeeed 8 STOP DURON sssccinterdanieieeciii isis dai dies edhe edi natin 8 OV EIVIOW osr iaia a ia taeda hasta ede ety asi a dade al eee A 8 Safety Functions of the STOP Button 2 00 0 eee ceeeeeeeeene eee eete eset eae eeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeenneeaes 8 FIAMOWMCGE sansan a deus inyeazoceey 8 Muinminated PUSHDUTON iirinn ataire na eak ea ee ied 2 Lee estates 86 Key Operaled Switch cis iseirss anis iee ciliate eeccg nt ice ale eee ee ees 8 Enabling SWIG ssaa ana E ESEE EA EEEE TEA EN SEAE SEENEN EEN SA EERS 88 Display the charge status of the bridging battery eee eeeeneeeeeenneeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeseenaeeeeseateeees 90 Configuring the evaluation of operator controls eee cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeesenateeees 91 OVGIVIGW ssi banida eip uh Vice EN A Ja bedee evades es bad che S ec ase eed es ee 91 Evaluating operator controls as direct KEYS eee cee eeeeeeeecenteeeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeeseeaaeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeeenaeeaaes 92 Co
215. evice You can change various settings in the Control Panel for example the transfer settings e Press the Taskbar button to activate the taskbar with opened Windows CE Start menu Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 115 Configuring the operating system 6 7 Loader F My Computer Internet Explorer z Open loader The following options are available to open the loader e The loader appears briefly after starting the HMI device e The loader appears when the project is closed If configured use the relevant operator control to close the project Additional information on this topic may be available in your plant documentation Password protection NOTICE If the password is no longer available you can only cancel password protection by updating the operating system All data on the HMI device will be deleted when you update the operating system You can protect the Control Panel and taskbar from unauthorized access You can only operate the Transfer and Start buttons if you do not enter a password This prevents inadvertent operations and increases security for the plant or machine You can then no longer change the settings outside the current project Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 116 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Configuring the operating system 6 7 Loader Pocket Internet Explorer Pocket Internet Explorer is install
216. ew the six screws approximately 1 cm out of the cover The cover is designed in such a way that the screws are retained Therefore do not screw the screws out further than 1 cm The screws can then be removed together with the cover 2 Put the cover with the screws to one side Note on closing 1 Place the sealing plugs into the cable inlets which are not used Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 70 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO nstallation and connection 4 5 Connecting Mobile Panel 277 Notes for closing NOTICE Permissible torque The housing of the Mobile Panel 277 is made of plastic Therefore the mounting hole threads cannot handle the same amount of stress as a comparable metallic housing Do not exceed 0 4 to 0 5 Nm of torque when tightening the screws If the screws are tightened more than 20 times there is risk of damage to the threads IP65 degree of protection Ensure that the seal belonging to the cover is present during mounting When you have finished working on the connections check to make sure that the unused threaded cable entry holes are fitted with rubber plugs Otherwise degree of protection IP65 is not ensured 4 5 3 Mobile Panel 277 ports For reasons of clarity the following figures depict the terminal compartment without the Velcro strip for fastening the memory card The following figure shows the port area for the data network Ports for PROFIBUS
217. example project this is a step by step introduction to the basics of configuring the WinCC flexible Sm rtServices Sm rtAccess and OPC server options Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO 5 Preface Online availability Screens Conventions Technical documentation on SIMATIC products and SIMATIC systems is available in PDF format in various languages at the following address http www automation siemens com simatic portal html_76 techdoku htm The HMI device is sometimes shown in the form of photographs in these operating instructions The photographs of the HMI device may differ slightly from the factory state of the HMI device Configuration and runtime software differ with regard to their names as follows e WinCC flexible 2008 for example refers to the configuration software The term WinCC flexible is used in a general context The full name for example WinCC flexible 2008 is always used when it is necessary to differentiate between different versions of the configuration software e WinCC flexible Runtime refers to the runtime software that can run on HMI devices e The name Mobile Panel 277 applies to the following HMI devices Mobile Panel 277 8 Mobile Panel 277 10 The following text notation will facilitate reading these operating instructions Notation Scope Add screen e Terminology that appears in the user interface for example
218. eys like buttons on an HMI device with a touch screen Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 209 Operating a project 8 11 Operating the Sm rtClient view Monitoring mode On a Sm rtClient view which is configured for monitoring mode you can only monitor the remote HMI device You cannot control its operation Operation Note It is not possible to operate the direct keys of the remote HMI device from the local HMI device The available operator controls depend on the HMI devices used e Same type of HMI devices You can operate the project of the remote HMI device with the operator controls of your HMI device e Operate keys from the local touch screen All the keys of the remote HMI device are displayed as buttons on the touch screen You can also touch them to operate them 8 11 2 Operation Operator input options The Sm rtClient view can be operated as follows e Starting remote control e Forcing permission e Ending remote control Procedure for starting remote control Proceed as follows 1 On the HMI device change to the screen with the Sm rtClient view The following options are available for establishing the connection to the remote HMI device The connection is established automatically The connection must be established by touching the appropriate button Depending on the configuration you may be required to enter the address of the remote
219. f e Flashing slowly e Flashing quickly e On You can use the LED to signal to the user that a function key should be pressed in a running project The following table shows the possible states of the LEDs and the corresponding entries in bit n 1 and bit n of the LED tags Bit n 1 Bit n LED status 0 0 Off Flashing quickly Flashing slowly 0 1 1 O ON continuous Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0AB0 95 Operator controls and displays 5 2 Operator controls of Mobile Panel 277 8 5 2 7 4 Evaluating the handwheel by means of system functions Application The handwheel is an optional operator control for the Mobile Panel You can enter incremental values using the handwheel in the runtime project Note Do not configure limit values in WinCC flexible for tags assigned to the handwheel Evaluation of the incremental values If the signals of the handwheel are assigned to a WinCC flexible tag then the forward and backward increments will be set off against each other This defines the absolute value of increments The maximum or minimum value of increments entered until the overflow is reached depends on the type of tag assigned A complete handwheel revolution yields 50 pulses The rotary pulse encoder supplies a maximum of 200 pulses per second Example e The handwheel has a starting value of 120 increments e You rotate the whee
220. f the connecting cable Do not exceed the permitted cable length of 30 m as you will otherwise risk functional errors Always maintain a maximum length of 30 m for the connecting cable This information concerns the length of the cable between the connection box and the HMI device For additional information refer to the Internet at http mall automation siemens com Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO 53 Installation and connection 4 4 Connecting the connection box Connection sequence Connect the connection box in the following sequence 1 Equipotential bonding 2 Supply voltage 3 PLC configuring PC if needed NOTICE Maintaining the connection sequence You risk damage to the connection box if you ignore the proper connection sequence Always adhere to the proper sequence when connecting the connection box 4 4 2 Opening and closing the connection box Follow the instructions below before opening the connection box PN Plus CAUTION Short circuit in the connection box A short circuit in the connection box PN Plus can lead to malfunction of the Mobile Panel 277 Take care when working on the opened connection box that conducting materials such as cable remains do not come into contact with the electrical circuits ESD When working in the open housing ensure that current carrying conductors do not come into contac
221. follows 1 Touch the desired alarm in the alarm view or the alarm window The alarm is selected 2 Touch the button in the simple alarm view or _ in the extended alarm view Alternative operation Depending on the configuration you can also acknowledge an alarm with a function key Result The alarm is acknowledged If the alarm belongs to an alarm group all the alarms of the associated group are acknowledged Please refer to your system documentation to check whether additional information on acknowledgment and available alarm groups is available there Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 226 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Operating alarms 9 6 Edit alarm 9 6 Edit alarm Introduction The configuration engineer can assign additional functions to each alarm These functions are executed when the alarm is processed Note When you edit an unacknowledged alarm it is acknowledged automatically Requirements The alarm to be edited is displayed in the alarm window or the alarm view Procedure Proceed as follows 1 Touch the desired alarm in the alarm view or the alarm window The alarm is selected 2 Touch the button in the simple alarm view or _ in the extended alarm view Result The system executes the additional functions of the alarm Please refer to your system documentation to check whether additional information on this subject is available there Mobile Panel 277 WinC
222. fully show the new page Navigate to another page 230200 The connection to the HTTP channel was interrupted due to an error This error is explained in detail by another system alarm Data is no longer exchanged Check the network connection Check the server configuration 304 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Appendix A 2 System alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 230201 The connection to HTTP channel was established Data is exchanged 230202 WININET DLL has detected an error This erroris Depending on the cause usually generated if it is not possible to connect to When an attempt to connect fails or a timeout error the server or if the server denies access because occurs ine client couldnor authenticate itsel e Check the network connection and the network A rejected server certificate could also cause a communication error in secure SSL connections e Check the server address For details refer to the error text in the alarm e Check whether the WebServer is actually running This text is always output in the language of your on the destination station Windows installation as it is returned by the Faulty authorization Windows operating system e The configured user name and or password do not Process values are not exchanged match those on the server Establish consistency The part of the alarm which is retur
223. g devices with two circuits The draft C standard for machine tools notes the following Enabling devices can either be a 2 position command device in conjunction with a Stop device or a 3 position command device The 3 position command device is preferable The operating principles of enabling devices are described in EN 60204 Through the findings from accident investigations and the existence of technical solutions the 3 stage enabling button became state of the art Positions 1 and 3 of the enabling button are Off functions Only the middle position allows the enabling function EN 60204 1 1997 is identical to IEC 60204 1 whereby the 3 stage enabling button is gaining international importance The Stop category of the enabling device must be selected on the basis of a risk assessment and correspond to a Category 0 or 1 Stop Awarnine Enabling buttons may only be used if the person activating them promptly recognizes a danger to personnel and can immediately take steps to avoid the danger Commands for unsafe conditions are not permitted to be issued with one enabling button alone For this purpose a secondary conscious start command by means of a button on the Mobile Panel 277 is required The only person allowed to remain in the danger zone is the person who is activating the enabling button In special operating modes safety is achieved through use of the enabling button in combination with reduction in the velocit
224. g the operating system 7 7 1 Overview Updating the operating system A compatibility conflict may occur when transferring a project to the HMI device This is caused by different versions of the configuration software used and the HMI device image available on the HMI device If there are different versions the transfer is aborted A message indicating a compatibility conflict is displayed on the configuring PC There are two ways to match the versions e Update the HMI device image if the project was created with the most recent version of the configuration software e Transfer a matching older version of the HMI device image if you do not want to adapt the project to the most recent version of the configuration software for the project NOTICE Data loss All data on the HMI device such as the project passwords and licenses will be deleted when you update the operating system Data channels An operating system update resets all parameters for the data channels The transfer can only be started in the Loader following reconfiguration of the data channels Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 178 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Commissioning a project 7 7 Updating the operating system 7 7 2 Reset to factory settings ProSave or WinCC flexible support operating system updates with or without reset to factory settings Updating the operating system without reset to factory settings Fir
225. gram memory change Since the HMI device only reads the address list during startup it does not recognize the address change and accesses the wrong memory areas If you cannot avoid compressing memory during operation turn off the HMI device before running the compress function Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0AB0 Safety instructions and general notes 2 2 1 Safety Instructions Safety regulations Awwarnine Strictly observe all instructions in these operating instructions at all times Otherwise hazardous situations can arise or the safety mechanisms in the HMI device can be rendered ineffective Observe the safety and accident prevention instructions applicable to your application in addition to the safety instructions given in this manual A WARNING The configuration engineer for a machine or system PLC must take precautions so that an interrupted program can be restarted normally after voltage dips or power failures Dangerous operating conditions must not occur even temporarily If faults in the system can cause bodily injury or significant property damage additional measures must be taken outside of the system These measures must also ensure safe operating conditions in the system in the event of a fault The system s configuration engineer must take precautions to ensure that memory changes that could lead to a dangerous situation can only be
226. h IEC 60529 Front panel and rear panel Description In installed status e IP65 3 5 Rated voltages The following table shows the rated voltage and the corresponding tolerance range Nominal voltage 24 VDC Tolerance range 20 4 V to 28 8 V 15 20 50 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0AB0 Installation and connection 4 4 1 Checking the Package Contents Check the package contents for visible signs of transport damage and for completeness NOTICE Do not install parts damaged during shipment In the case of damaged parts contact your Siemens representative The documentation belongs to the HMI device and is required for subsequent commissioning Keep all provided documentation in a safe place for the entire service life of the HMI device You must pass on the enclosed documentation to any subsequent owner or user of the HMI device Make sure that every supplement to the documentation that you receive is stored together with the operating instructions 4 2 Mounting the Connection Box and Wall Holder Requirements The following are required for mounting e Three M5 cylinder head screws for the wall holder of the HMI device e Four M4 cylinder head screws for the connection box If the HMI device is to be operated while hooked into the wall holder ensure that the connecting cable is sufficiently long Procedure for
227. h or without a power shutdown Advantages Limitation of effective range Fast restart No loss of machine coordinates and thus no recalibration upon restart Preservation of tool and workpiece Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 98 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Operator controls and displays 5 3 Operator controls of Mobile Panel 277 10 e Triggering of the Emergency Stop function of a monitored system by means of looping in the Emergency Stop circuit Advantage Simple integration in an existing Emergency Stop circuit when the system to be monitored has no option for a fast process stop SIEMENS STOP button Due to its position the STOP button is equally accessible to both left handed and right handed individuals Due to its profiled design the STOP button is easily accessible The STOP button can be activated if the panel is dropped Operation The STOP button is operated by pressing the button Once the stop operation has been initiated the STOP button remains engaged in the stop position Note The STOP button engages when activated Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0AB0 99 Operator controls and displays 5 3 Operator controls of Mobile Panel 277 10 Releasing the STOP button Awarnine If you have activated the STOP button and thereby brought the monitored system to a standstill the STOP button may
228. h into input mode by means of the lt key 3 Enter the respective user data in the field Assign the user to one of the groups from the drop down list box Enter a value between 0 and 60 for the logoff time in minutes The value 0 stands for no automatic logoff Result The new user is created Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 217 Operating a project 8 12 Project security 8 12 6 Changing user data Requirements You have opened a screen containing the user view Which data you are allowed to change depends on your authorization e You are an administrator or a user with user management authorization In these cases you are allowed to change the data for all the users on the HMI device in the user view User name Group assignment Password Logoff time e You are a user without user management authorization In this case you are only allowed to change your personal user data Password Logoff time if configured Note You can only change the logoff time and password for the Admin user You can only change the logoff time for the PLC_User This user is used for logging on via the PLC Procedure for changing user data in the simple user view Proceed as follows 1 In the user view touch the user whose user data you want to change 2 When entering the data use exactly the same procedure as for creating a user Procedure
229. hange has been resumed 60000 Win32 function alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 60000 This alarm is generated by the DisplaySystemAlarms function The text to be displayed is transferred to the function as a parameter 60010 The file could not be copied in the direction defined Restart the system function or check the paths of the because one of the two files is currently open or the source target files Using Windows NT XP The user source target path is not available executing WinCC flexible Runtime must be granted It is possible that the Windows user has no access access rights for the files rights to one of the two files 60011 An attempt was made to copy a file to itself Check the path of the source target file It is possible that the Windows user has no access rights to one of the two files Using Windows NT XP with NTFS The user executing WinCC flexible Runtime must be granted access rights for the files 70000 Win32 function alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 70010 The application could not be started because it Check whether the application exists in the specified could not be found in the path specified or there is path or close other applications insufficient memory space 70011 The system time could not be modified Check the time which is to be set The error alarm only appears in connection with Using Windows NT XP The user executing WinCC area pointer Date tim
230. he following requirements e Safety category 3 according to EN 954 1 e Requirements of EN 60204 1 under compliance with the safety instructions detailed in the operating instructions IEC 61131 The HMI device satisfies the requirements and criteria conforming to IEC 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Part 2 Equipment requirements and tests Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO 35 Safety instructions and general notes 2 3 Operating safety 2 3 Operating safety Standards The HMI device complies with the following standards EN 60204 1 Safety of Machinery Electrical Equipment of Machines EN 61131 1 and EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers The HMI device was tested for EMC in accordance with the following standards EN 50081 2 EMC Unwanted emissions EN 61000 6 2 Generic standard Immunity industrial environments EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers STOP button for fast machine stop EN 60947 5 1 1997 K 2 2 Low voltage Switchgear and Control Gear Positive Opening Contacts EN 954 1 category 3 is achievable with an external monitoring device Two potential free switches for the connection of external I O devices for a rated voltage of 24 V and max current 500 mA safety low voltage according to EN 61131 2 or EN 50178 equipment for power installations with electronic resources Enabling device in accordance with EN 60204 1 in safety categories a
231. he touch screen with pointed or sharp objects Avoid applying excessive pressure to the touch screen with hard objects Both these will substantially reduce the useful life of the touch screen and even lead to total failure Do not use anything else but your fingers to operate the touch screen of the HMI device Damage to the keyboard Pressing the keys with a hard object considerably reduces the useful life of the key mechanism Always use your fingers to operate the keys of your HMI device Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 80 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Operator controls and displays 5 1 Overview 5 1 2 Mobile Panel 277 10 STOP button Display with touch screen Standard input unit The standard input unit on the HMI device is the touch screen All operator control objects required for touch operation are displayed on the touch screen once the HMI device has started NOTICE Damage to the touch screen Never touch the touch screen with pointed or sharp objects Avoid applying excessive pressure to the touch screen with hard objects Both these will substantially reduce the useful life of the touch screen and even lead to total failure You should not use anything but your fingers to operate the touch screen of the HMI device A touch pen is more suitable for high resolution images Touch pens are available as accessories see Touch pens Page 26 Mobile Panel 27
232. he type String 190013 The user has entered a string that is longer than Only enter strings that do not exceed the permitted tag the tag The string is automatically shortened to the permitted length length Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO 301 Appendix A 2 System alarms 190100 Area pointer alarms Number 190100 Effect causes The area pointer is not updated because the address configured for this pointer does not exist Type Warnings Errors PLC acknowledgment HMI device acknowledgment LED mapping Trend request Trend transfer 1 8 Trend transfer 2 No Consecutive number displayed in WinCC flexible ES NOOR WD Remedy Check the configuration 190101 The area pointer is not updated because it is not possible to map the PLC type to the area pointer type Parameter type and no see alarm 190100 190102 The area pointer is updated after the cause of the last error state has been eliminated return to normal operation Parameter type and no See alarm 190100 200000 PLC coordination alarms e The cable is defective e The PLC does not respond is defective etc e System overload Number Effect causes Remedy 200000 Coordination is not executed because the address Change the address or set up the address in the PLC configured in the PLC does not exist is not set 2
233. hronization The values of the recipe view are synchronized with the associated recipe tags In this case changes to values in the recipe view have an immediate effect on the values of the associated recipe tags The values are only synchronized when an operating element that is outside the recipe view is operated e Synchronization by the user The values of the recipe view and the associated recipe tags are not synchronized automatically The configuration engineer has assigned the same function to the button or a different operating element in the recipe view The recipe tags and the recipe view are only synchronized when you operate the buttons or the appropriate operating element Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 237 Operating recipes 10 6 Operating the recipe view Recipe tags online offline The configuration engineer can configure a recipe so that changes to the values of the recipe tags do not have an immediate effect on the current process Synchronization of the recipe values between the HMI device and the PLC depends on whether the configuration engineer has selected the settings Tags online or the setting Tags offline for a recipe e Tags online This setting has the following effect When you change recipe values in the recipe screen these changes are applied immediately by the PLC and immediately influence the process If recipe valu
234. iate scripts and functions at greater intervals If the alarm appears more frequently Restart the HMI device 180002 The screen keyboard could not be activated Reinstall WinCC flexible Runtime Possible causes TouchInputPC exe was not registered due toa faulty Setup 190000 Tag alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 190000 It is possible that the tag is not updated 190001 The tag is updated after the cause of the last error state has been eliminated return to normal operation 190002 The tag is not updated because communication Select the system function SetOnline to go online with the PLC is down 190004 The tag is not updated because the configured tag Check the configuration address does not exist 190005 The tag is not updated because the configured PLC Check the configuration type does not exist for this tag Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 300 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Appendix A 2 System alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 190006 The tag is not updated because it is not possible to Check the configuration map the PLC type in the data type of the tag 190007 The tag value is not modified because the Set online mode or reconnect to the PLC connection to the PLC is interrupted or the tag is offline 190008 The threshold values configured for the tag have Observe the configured or current threshold va
235. if this has been configured in the project and the PLC program Additional information on this subject is available in the WinCC flexible system manual NOTICE Synchronizing the date and time If the data and time is not synchronized and time based reactions are triggered by the HMI device malfunctions in the open loop control may occur Synchronize the date and time if time based reactions are triggered in the open loop control See also Restarting the HMI Device Page 138 6 5 2 Changing Regional Settings Introduction In different countries for example the date time and decimal points are displayed differently You can adjust the display format to meet the requirements of different regions The country specific settings apply to the current project If the project language is changed the country specific settings are also changed Requirements You have opened the Regional and Language Settings dialog box by pressing the Regional Settings Vicon Regional and Language Settings Many programs have different international settings Regional adjustments in date time currency and numbers conventions for displaying and _ sorting data can be achieved in changing those international rerman Germany Region selection box Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 131 Configuring the operating system 6 5
236. ignment n c GND 24 V Data channel B n c GND 5 V floating 5 VDC floating 24 VDC out max 100 mA Data channel A n C oJoiNI DIA A JV NJ gt Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 269 Technical specifications 12 3 Mobile Panel 277 port assignments 12 3 2 USB USB socket eel Pin assignment of the USB port Pin Assignment 1 5 VDC out max 500 mA 2 USB DN 3 USB DP 4 GND 12 3 3 RJ45 for connecting cable DP RJ45 plug connector 8 pin 1 8 Pin assignment of the RJ45 connector for the connecting cable DP Pin Assignment RxD B RxD A CTS B ID RTS B IC RTS A IC CTS A ID TxD B TxD A oINI JAJA JV IN gt Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 270 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Technical specifications 12 3 Mobile Panel 277 port assignments 12 3 4 RJ45 for connecting cable PN RJ45 plug connector 8 pin 1 8 Pin assignment of the RJ45 connector for the connecting cable PN Pin Assignment TD TD RD n c n c RD ICD ICD ooINIaoJAajJ AJ IN gt 12 3 5 Post connector for connecting cable DP Post connector 10 pin 10 2 IMM TT 9 1 Pin assignment of the post connector for the connecting cable DP Pin Assignment Circuit 24 VDC Power supply GND 24 V Stop 23 Stop circuit Stop 24 Stop 13 Stop 14 Enable 1 Enable circuit Enable 1 Enable 2 Enable 2 oJo
237. ile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 122 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Contiguring the operating system Procedure Result 6 3 Changing settings for operation Proceed as follows 1 Press the Open Input Panel button to display the screen keyboard 2 By pressing the ur button you can switch between the numerical and alphanumerical screen keyboard Set the position of the screen keyboard by moving the screen keyboard on the screen Save your settings by pressing the Save button Close the screen keyboard by pressing the Close Input Panel button ao a Aa Q Close the dialog The screen keyboard settings have been modified 6 3 2 Setting the Character Repetition of the Keyboard Introduction Requirements You can set the character repeat for the screen keyboard in the Control Panel 4S You have opened the Keyboard Properties dialog box by pressing the Keyboard E icon Keyboard Properties ok Repeat v cnapble character repeat Repeat delay Long Poveeueeeepueggl a A Repeat rate Slow Petter eee eee a Ho BI Tap here and hold down a key to Check box for activating the character repeat Slider control and buttons for the delay time before character repeat Slider control and buttons for the rate of the character repeat Test field 0O00 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 123 Configuring
238. ing should only be possible executed without a logged on user with permission Change the configuration by setting a required permission for the input object 90044 A user action which has to be confirmed was Repeat the user action if necessary blocked because there is another user action pending 110000 Offline function alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 110000 The operating mode was changed Offline mode is now set 110001 The operating mode was changed Online mode is now set 110002 The operating mode was not changed Check the connection to the PLCs Check whether the address area for the area pointer 88 Coordination in the PLC is available 110003 The operating mode of the specified PLC was changed by the system function SetConnectionMode The operating mode is now offline 110004 The operating mode of the specified PLC has been changed by the system function SetConnectionMode The operating mode is now online Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO 295 Appendix A 2 System alarms does not match the user version configured in WinCC flexible WinCC flexible Runtime is therefore closed Number Effect causes Remedy 110005 An attempt was made to use the system function Switch the complete system to online mode then SetConnectionMode to switch the specified PLC to execute
239. ion 10 frequency cycles per axis in each of the three mutually vertical axes Shock Shock testing in accordance Type of shock half sine with IEC 60068 Part 2 29 Shock intensity Peak value 15 g duration 11 ms Direction of impact 3 shocks in directions in each of the three mutually vertical axes Falling Drop test in accordance with EN 60068 2 32 Climatic ambient conditions for the mobile panel The following table shows the permitted climatic ambient conditions for use of the mobile panel Ambient conditions Temperature e Operation e Storage Transport Permitted range e From 0 C to 40 C From 20 C to 60 C Comments See the Mounting positions and type of fixation section Relative humidity 10 to 90 without condensation Corresponds to relative humidity load degree 2 in accordance with IEC 61131 part 2 Atmospheric pressure 1080 hPa to 795 hPa Corresponds to an elevation of 1 000 to 2 000 m Pollutant concentration SOz lt 0 5 ppm condensation Relative humidity lt 60 no Test 10 cm3 m 10 days H2S lt 0 1 ppm condensation Relative humidity lt 60 no Test 1 cm m3 10 days 46 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Planning application 3 2 Mounting positions and type of fixation Climatic ambient conditions for the connection box The following ta
240. ion box Introduction You can set a unique box ID for station identification in each connection box If configured correspondingly the box ID can be read out of the HMI device and be transmitted to the PLC Rotary encoder switch The following figures show the position of both rotary encoder switches in the connection box DP and the connection box PN Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 56 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Installation and connection 4 4 Connecting the connection box Oo 00 OO oOo OO BB MOOO00 MOOO00 MOO000 mOOO0G Rotary encoder switch Example for setting the box ID Rotary encoding switch for more significant bits Rotary encoding switch for less significant bits The figure shows the set box ID 27H for example 39 in decimal format Procedure Proceed as follows 1 Open the connection box 2 Set the Box ID with the help of a screwdriver The input is in hexadecimal format Values between 0 and 255 can be set in decimal format 3 Close the connection box Result The box ID is set Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0AB0O 57 Installation and connection 4 4 Connecting the connection box 4 4 4 Stripping the Insulation of Cables Stripping insulation 58 The following figure shows how to strip an MPI PROFIBUS DP cable All specifications in mm The following figure shows you how t
241. ipe view Recipe Name No Orange Bi 1 4 Data Record Name No Nectar z 2 4 im v sja auje Selection box for the recipe Selection box for the recipe data record Element name The element name designates a specific element in the recipe data record Display field This show the number of the selected recipe or the selected recipe data record Value of the element Buttons for editing a recipe data record Status bar for display of the status messages a00 O80 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 234 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Operating recipes 10 4 Displaying a recipe Simple recipe view The simple recipe view consists of three areas e Recipe list e Record list e Element list In the simple recipe view each area is shown separately on the HMI device Depending on the configuration the simple recipe view starts with the recipe list or data record list The following figure shows an example of the record list Juice Beverage Nectar Number of the recipe data record Recipe data records Buttons for changing the displayed list and calling the menu 0o00 ono Display of values NOTICE Changing the recipe data record in the background Applies to the processing of a recipe data record If values of the corresponding recipe data record are changed by a PLC job the recipe view is not updated automatically To update the recipe view
242. ired delay time in seconds in the Wait sec selection box With the value 0 the project starts immediately It is then no longer possible to call the Loader after switching on the HMI device If you still wish to access the Loader an operating element must be configured to close the project 2 Confirm your entries The dialog closes Result The delay time for the HMI device is now set Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 142 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Contiguring the operating system 6 7 Communication settings 6 7 Communication settings 6 7 1 Changing MPI PROFIBUS DP Settings Introduction Requirements The communication settings for MPI or PROFIBUS DP are defined in the HMI device project In the following cases the communication settings might have to be changed e The first time the project is transferred If changes are made to the project but are only applied later NOTICE Transfer mode using MPI PROFIBUS DP The bus parameters are read from the project currently loaded on the HMI device The settings for MPI PROFIBUS DP transfer can be modified The following steps are required e Close the project e Change the settings on the HMI device e Then return to Transfer mode The changed MP PROFIBUS DP settings will be overwritten in the following cases e The project is started again e A project is transferred Transfer settings A project can only be transferre
243. itch Fast connector IF1 port Location of the ports 272 Overall dimensions 262 Power failure 268 Recovery time 268 Terminal strip 1 273 Terminal strip 2 Connection box Plus Switching states Emergency Stop circuit 111 Switching states Pr circuit 111 Wiring examples Connection box PN Fast connector IF1 port 275 LEDs Location of the ports 274 Overall dimensions 2 Power failure 269 Recovery time 269 Terminal strip 1 275 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Index Terminal strip 2 276 Connection example 28 Enabling button 283 Safety circuit device STOP button To safety category 3 a with safety category 3 2 283 284 Connection graphic Equipotential bonding Power supply 6 Connection point recognition 24 317 Connection sie Connection to PLCs Number Control Panel MPI 144 Open Operating Password protection 116 PROFIBUS Screen keyboard Cookies Creating Recipe data record ag pas 246 C Tick mark Australia D Data channel Enabling 145 Locking Parameter cy B20 120 Data consistency Data flow Date Entering Setting a Synchronizing Date format 132 eg ha Date time properties 119 129 Deactivating Password protection 129 Decimal Default gateway Degree of protection Safety instruction 56 Delay time Setting 120 141 Delete Certificate Recipe TERM 241 24
244. ives for electrical installation Pulse shaped interference Test voltage Degree of severity Electrostatic discharge Air discharge 8 kV 3 in accordance with Contact discharge 6 kV IEC 61000 4 2 Bursts 2 kV power supply cable 3 high speed transient 2 kV signal cable gt 30 m interference 1 kV signal cable lt 30 m in accordance with IEC 61000 4 4 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO 41 Safety instructions and general notes 2 9 Electromagnetic Compatibility Pulse shaped interference Test voltage Degree of severity High power surge pulses in accordance with IEC 61000 4 5 external protective circuit required refer to S7 300 PLC Installation chapter Lightning and overvoltage protection e Asymmetrical coupling 2 kV power cable 3 DC voltage with protective elements 2 kV signal data cable gt 30 m with protective elements as required e Symmetrical coupling 1 kV power cable 3 DC voltage with protective elements 1 KV signal cable gt 30 m with protective elements as required Sinusoidal interference The following table shows the EMC behavior of the modules with respect to sinusoidal interference This requires the HMI device to meet the specifications and directives for electrical installation Sinusoidal interference Test values Degree of severity HF radiation in e 80 amplitude modulation at
245. k whether the compressed project file stored on the HMI device corresponds to the existing runtime project Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 168 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0AB0 Commissioning a project 7 5 Transfer 7 5 2 Starting manual transfer Introduction Requirements Procedure Result See also You can manually switch the HMI device to Transfer mode as follows e With a configured operating element during ongoing operation e Inthe Loader of the HMI device e The project hmi is opened in WinCC flexible The HMI device is connected to a configuring PC The data channel is configured on the HMI device The HMI device is in Transfer mode Proceed as follows 1 On the configuring PC select the Transfer settings command in the menu Project gt Transfer in WinCC flexible The Select devices for transfer dialog opens 2 Select the HMI device in the left area of the dialog 3 Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the configuring PC Set the connection parameters 4 Set the transfer parameters in the right area of the dialog 5 If you wish to transfer the compressed project file together with the runtime project to the HMI device Select the Enable backtransfer check box 6 Start transfer in WinCC flexible with Transfer The configuring PC checks the connection to the HMI device The project is transferred to the HMI device If the connectio
246. l 10 increments forwards and 3 increments backwards This results in a new value of 127 increments 5 2 7 5 Evaluating the key operated switch by means of system functions Application The key operated switch is an optional operator control of the HMI device The key operated switch serves to lock functions in a running project which can be triggered by means of the HMI device Bit assignment The following table shows the bit assignment for the tag of the key operated switch Bit 1 Bit 0 Key position 0 0 Central position 0 1 Turned in clockwise direction up to stop 1 0 Turned counter clockwise up to stop Note If you use a tag of the Boolean type for the key operated switch the following assignment applies e Status 0 Central position of the key operated switch e Status 1 Key operated switch turned clockwise or counter clockwise to the stop Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 96 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Operator controls and displays 5 2 7 6 Controlling and evaluating the illuminated pushbutton by means of system functions Application 5 2 Operator controls of Mobile Panel 277 8 The illuminated pushbuttons are optional operator controls of the HMI device The integrated LEDs can be controlled from the PLC The LEDs can assume the following states e Off e Flashing slowly e Flashing quickly e On You can use the LEDs to signal to the user that a
247. l information on this subject is available there The configuration engineer can group alarms into alarm groups When you acknowledge an individual alarm of an alarm group you acknowledge all alarms which belong to the same alarm group The alarm events are stored in an internal buffer The size of this alarm buffer depends on the HMI device type The configuration engineer can activate alarm reporting on the project In this case alarm events are output directly on the connected printer The configuration engineer can define whether each individual alarm is logged An alarm of this type is printed when the alarm events Incoming and Outgoing occur If you want to print alarms of the System alarm class you have to print the contents of the associated alarm buffer For this case the configuration engineer has to configure an operating element for printing the alarm buffer Alarm events are stored in an alarm log provided this log file is configured The capacity of the log file is limited by the storage medium and system limits Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Operating alarms 9 2 9 3 9 2 Recognizing pending alarms Recognizing pending alarms You can recognize pending alarms that must be acknowledged by means of the alarm indicator The alarm indicator is a graphic symbol indicating pending alarms or alarms requiring acknowledgment depending on the configura
248. l position 1 gt Enable 2 o gt Panic 3 o gt Neutral position 1 Switch setting 1 2 3 ZT left ZT right ZT left ZT right ZT Enabling button If the operator has pressed the enabling button through to the Panic setting the Enable setting will be skipped when the switch is released The signals of the enabling button are fed to the connection box via the connection cable For special manual operating modes these signals must be interconnected via two channels from the connection box to the safety circuits for power shutdown Note Releasing the enabling button or pressing it through to the Panic setting does not require acknowledgment of the safety shutdown Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 103 Operator controls and displays 5 3 Operator controls of Mobile Panel 277 10 5 3 3 Configuring the evaluation of operator controls 5 3 3 1 Overview Operator controls There are two ways of transferring data between the HMI device and the PLC e Direct keys within the project e System functions of WinCC flexible Note The following sections are intended for the configuration engineer of the HMI device 5 3 3 2 Evaluating operator controls as direct keys Introduction The touch buttons of a project can be assigned direct key functions Byte assignment The following figure shows the byte assignment of the direct key bits for touch buttons in the
249. ld Enter numerical alphanumerical or symbolic values in the I O field Symbolic I O field Select an entry from the drop down list box Slider control Move the slider control Procedure for text boxes Values are entered in the project text boxes Based on your configuration the values are saved to tags and transferred for example to the PLC Proceed as follows 1 Touch the desired text box within the screen The screen keyboard opens Depending on your configuration you can enter values in the text box in the following manner Numerical values for example decimal numbers hexadecimal numbers binary values Alphanumerical values for example digits and letters Date time Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 194 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Operating a project 8 4 Entering values using the touch screen 2 Enter the value 3 Confirm your entry with lt or discard your entry with the button Esc 8 4 2 Entering and editing numerical values Numerical screen keyboard When you touch an operating element for numerical input on the HMI device touch screen the numerical screen keyboard appears This is the case for example for a text box The screen keyboard is automatically hidden again when input is complete Numerical screen keyboard Note Opened screen keyboard When the screen keyboard is open PLC job 51 Select screen has no function Formats for nu
250. le in your plant documentation 10 7 2 Creating a recipe data record Introduction Create a new recipe data record in the recipe list or in the record list Then enter the values for the new record in the element list and save the record Requirements A screen with a simple recipe view is displayed Procedure Proceed as follows 1 If the recipe list contains several recipes Select the recipe for which you want to create a new recipe data record 2 Open the recipe list menu 3 Select the menu command 0 New Creates a new record The element list of the new record opens 4 Enter values for the elements of the data record The tags of the record can be assigned default values depending on the configuration 5 Open the element list menu and select the menu command 0 Save Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 246 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Operating recipes Result 10 7 Operating the simple recipe view Enter a name for the new record Confirm your entries If you change the new data record number to an existing data record number the existing data record is overwritten The new recipe data record is saved to the selected recipe See also Recipes in the project Page 232 10 7 3 Editing a recipe data record Introduction Edit the values of the recipe data records in a simple recipe view Synchronization with the PLC If you want to display the current recipe values fro
251. luate whether Mobile Panel 277 is operated with one hand or with both Note The enabling buttons and the membrane keyboard can be operated simultaneously because there is no electrical connection between the two The enabling buttons meet the requirements of Safety Category 3 to EN 954 1 when used in combination with an external monitoring device Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO Operator controls and displays 5 2 Operator controls of Mobile Panel 277 8 Circuit diagram The figure below shows the operating positions and interconnections of the enabling button Enabling button left Enabling button right 3 level 2 circuit 3 level 2 circuit 123 Giredti 321 oo ircui oo ae aN oe ad nce Sa F 5 123 Circuit 2 321 I AA es Sells aie a g F Evaluation circuit gt a ZX Circuit 1 ZX Circuit 2 Connecting cables Connection box Plus or connection box Basic ENABLE 1 ENABLE 1 Terminal strip 2 Switch settings The primary function of the evaluating logic is to detect the three switch settings Switch setting Function Enabling button Switch state Neutral position Not activated OFF open Enable Activated ON closed Panic Pressed OFF open Enabling button left Enabling button right 3 level 2 circuit 3 level 2 circuit 123 321 123 321 oT Bee ee ae The following figure shows the switching
252. lues of been violated for example by the tag e A value entered e A system function e A script 190009 An attempt has been made to assign the tag a Observe the range of values for the data type of the value which is outside the permitted range of tags values for this data type For example a value of 260 was entered for a byte tag or a value of 3 for an unsigned word tag 190010 Too many values are written to the tag The following remedies are available for example in a loop triggered by a script e Increase the time interval between multiple write Values are lost because only up to 100 actions are actions saved to the buffer e Do not use an array tag longer than 6 words when you configure an acknowledgment on the HMI device using Acknowledgment HMI 190011 Possible cause 1 The value entered could not be written to the Make sure that the value entered lies within the range configured PLC tag because the high or low limit of values of the control tags was exceeded The system discards the entry and restores the original value Possible cause 2 The connection to the PLC was interrupted Check the connection to the PLC 190012 It is not possible to convert a value from a source Check the range of values or the data type of the tags format to a target format for example An attempt is being made to assign a value toa counter that is outside the valid PLC specific value range A tag of the type Integer should be assigned a value of t
253. m function 330000 GUI alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 330022 Too many dialogs are open on the HMI device Close all dialogs you do not require on the HMI device 330026 The password will expire after the number of days Enter a new password shown Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO 315 Appendix A 2 System alarms 350000 GUI alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 350000 PROFIsafe packages have not arrived within the Check the WLAN connection necessary period There is a communication problem with the F CPU RT is terminated 350001 PROFIsafe packages have not arrived within the Check the WLAN connection necessary period There is a communication problem with the F CPU The PROFIsafe connection is re established 350002 An internal error has occurred Internal error Runtime is terminated 350003 Feedback concerning the connection established with the F CPU The Emergency Off buttons are active immediately 350004 PROFIsafe communication was set and the connection was cleared The Runtime can be terminated The Emergency Off buttons are deactivated immediately 350005 Incorrect address configured for the F slave Check and modify the address of the F slave in WinCC No PROFIsafe connection flexible ES 350006 The project has started At the start of the project Press the two enabling butto
254. m the PLC in the simple recipe view you first have to read the current values from the PLC with the menu command 2 from PLC in the element list The values changed in the recipe view only take effect in the PLC when you transfer the edited data record to the PLC with the menu command 1 to PLC Requirements A screen with a simple recipe view is displayed Procedure Proceed as follows 1 OO A W DY If the recipe list contains several recipes Select the recipe which contains the desired recipe data record Open the data record list Select the recipe data record you want to change Open the element list Change the values of the records as required Save your changes with the menu command 0 Save The recipe data record is saved Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 247 Operating recipes 10 7 Operating the simple recipe view Result The edited recipe data record has now been saved in the selected recipe See also Recipes in the project Page 232 10 7 4 Deleting a recipe data record Introduction You can delete all the data records which are not required Requirements A screen with a simple recipe view is displayed Procedure Proceed as follows 1 a A O N Result If the recipe list contains several recipes Select the recipe which contains the desired recipe data record Open the data record list Select the
255. me text box to activate the network functions Proceed as follows 1 Enter the device name for the HMI device in the Device name text box 2 Enter a description for the HMI device in the Device description text box 3 Confirm your entries The dialog closes The device name for the HMI device is now set Overview of network operation Page 149 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 151 Configuring the operating system 6 8 Configuring network operation 6 8 3 Changing the Network Configuration Overview You can change the network settings for the LAN connection under Network amp Dial Up Connections Requirement changing LAN connection settings You have pressed the Network amp Dial Up Connections icon to open the following view Fie Eait view Advanced gt i Fz E Kale A Lalka Procedure Proceed as follows 1 Open the LAN90001 entry The SMC LAN91C111 Ethernet Settings dialog opens SMC LAN91C111 Ethernet Settings OKy x IP Address Name Servers An IP address can be automatically assigned to this j computer If your network Specify an IP address does not automatically assign IP Address ee IP addresses ask your network a aie ay administrator for an address Subnet Mask a and then type it in the space provided Default Gateway 2 Select either automatic address assignment via DHC
256. merical values You can enter values in numerical text boxes based on the following formats e Decimal e Binary e Hexadecimal Note Entry of hexadecimal values When you enter values in hexadecimal format the alphanumerical screen keyboard opens Limit value test of numerical values Tags can be assigned limit values If you enter a value that lies outside of this limit it will not be accepted for example 80 with a limit value of 78 In this case the HMI device will deliver a system alarm if an alarm window is configured The original value is displayed again Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 195 Operating a project 8 4 Entering values using the touch screen Decimal places for numerical values The configuration engineer can define the number of decimal places for a numerical text box The number of decimal places is checked when you enter a value in this type of I O field e Decimal places in excess of the limit are ignored e Empty decimal places are filled with O Procedure Numerical values can be entered character by character via the buttons on the numerical screen keyboard Proceed as follows 1 Touch the desired operating element within the screen The numerical screen keyboard opens The existing value is displayed in the screen keyboard and is selected 2 Enter the value When entering hexadecimal values the keys with letters G to Z are operabl
257. n change the symbols for the alarm classes Please refer to your system documentation to check whether additional information on this subject is available there Alarm window The alarm window is independent of the process screen Depending on the configuration the alarm window opens automatically as soon as a new alarm is pending for acknowledgment The alarm window can be configured so that it only closes after all the alarms have been acknowledged The layout and the operation of the alarm window are the same as for the alarm view Please refer to your system documentation to check whether additional information on this subject is available there Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 225 Operating alarms 9 4 Display infotexts for an alarm 9 4 Display infotexts for an alarm Displaying infotext The configuration engineer can also provide infotext for alarms Procedure Proceed as follows 1 Touch the desired alarm in the alarm view or the alarm window The alarm is selected 2 Touch the Ll button in the simple alarm view or _f in the extended alarm view If configured the infotext assigned to this alarm is displayed 3 Close the screen for displaying the infotext by means of the x button See also Displaying alarms Page 223 9 5 Acknowledge alarm Requirements The alarm to be acknowledged is displayed in the alarm window or the alarm view Procedure Proceed as
258. n is not available or is defective an error message is displayed on the configuring PC When the transfer is completed successfully the project can be found on the HMI device The transferred project is then started automatically Operating modes Page 166 Data Transmission Options Page 167 Configuring the data channel Page 145 Overview Page 168 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 169 Commissioning a project 7 5 Transfer 7 5 3 Starting automatic transfer Introduction The HMI device can be automatically switched to Transfer mode during runtime as soon as transfer is started on the configuring PC connected Automatic transfer is particularly suited for the test phase of a new project since transfer is completed without interfering with the HMI device Automatic transfer is available for the following data channels e Serial e MPI PROFIBUS DP e USB e Ethernet NOTICE If the automatic transfer has been activated on the HMI device and a transfer is initiated on the configuring PC the project currently running is automatically stopped The HMI device then automatically switches to Transfer mode After the commissioning phase deactivate the automatic transfer so that the HMI device cannot be inadvertently switched to transfer mode The transfer mode can trigger unintentional actions in the device You can set a password for the Loader of the HMI devic
259. n or alarm Objects are used to view or enter texts and values on the HMI device Operating element Plant PLC PLC job Component of a project used to enter values and trigger functions A button for example is an operating element General term referring to machines processing centers systems plants and processes which are operated and monitored on an HMI device A PLC is a general term for devices and systems with which the HMI device communicates e g SIMATIC S7 A PLC job triggers a function for the PLC at the HMI device Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 327 Glossary Process visualization Visualization of technical processes by means of text and graphic elements Configured plant screens allow operator intervention in active plant processes by means of the input and output data Project Result of a configuration using a configuration software The project normally contains several screens with embedded system specific objects basic settings and alarms The project file of a project configured in WinCC flexible is saved under the file name extension hmi You need to distinguish between a project on the configuring PC and that on an HMI device A project may be available in more languages on the configuring PC than can be managed on the HMI device The project on the configuring PC can also be set up for different HMI devices Only the runtime project tha
260. n to gain access to network resources Enter the Password user name password and domain provided by your Domain network administrator Procedure Proceed as follows 1 Enter the user name in the User name text box Enter your password in the Password text box Enter the domain name in the Domain text box A O N Confirm your entries The dialog closes Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 153 Configuring the operating system 6 8 Configuring network operation Result See also 6 8 5 Requirements 154 The logon information has now been set Overview of network operation Page 149 Changing E Mail Settings You have opened the WinCC flexible Internet Settings dialog box by pressing the WinCC Internet Settings ba icon WinCC flexible Internet Settings OK fa Name Setting the SMTP server SMTP server Use the default of the project file lt O pamm l a Sender Simatic HMI Device I e Authentication T 3 Name for the sender E mail account Note Options Additional tabs may appear in the WinCC flexible Internet Settings tab This depends on the options that have been enabled for network operation in the project Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Contiguring the operating system 6 8 Configuring network op
261. nCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO 207 Operating a project 8 10 Operating the status force Operating elements Depending on your configuration you can operate the trend view using the following buttons Buttons Functions Gf Read button Updates the display in the Status Value column This button engages when it is pressed You cannot operate any text boxes until the button is actuated again and the refresh is stopped bal Write button Applies the new value in the Control Value column The control value is written to the PLC 8 10 2 Operation Operator input options Status Force can be operated as follows e Change the column sequence e Read the status values of the connected PLC e Enter values and transfer them to the PLC Change column sequence Depending on the configuration you can change the column sequence of Status Force Proceed as follows 1 Touch the column header which you wish to exchange with a different column header 2 Keeping the touch screen pressed move the column heading to the column heading you wish to exchange it with Result The columns are displayed in the modified sequence Procedure for reading the status value Proceed as follows 1 Enter the address and the desired format of a value for each line Touch the respective columns to display the screen keyboard 2 Once you have entered all of the desired values touch the _f button
262. na aaaea a aa adancecucuaee aa E a a a EEE aaa ada sbandbeluatlactveds 8 11 Operating the Sm rtClient viSW 200 ec ee eeeeee eee eeeee ee ceeeeeeeeeeaeeeseaaeeeseeaaeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeeeneeaaes ori sOVGRVICW as a tec eeciedb ie nan tin ietree inereds rere ative Hives itera abet eevee enced 8 112 OPSRAUOM deecczccccicenasadon cece coaasakaaennagencesddultstanzaavatsdeaachtiea iedandstelyansstiganassdadeavsdag ad daa kadaa kaaa a 8 12 Project SOCUIILY 5 case cvsnczcasapaczecudeces chen cau ehandece ces shapeecevipdane esadeee tesendaenvapgceesandede sbiea dau datedgedderehapeenid BENZ OVER VIG W E T race lees E eg suet aed E A N A E E te 8 122 USE VOW psn coe seueta ete deel deeds cusses EE 0 12 3 User IOQOM ois csccec cans eleceeticeeccdeece stan R 8 124 WSOP IOG OR cece cccees vite vite E A a a E tidak Geta salvets ated ennai a 8 12 5 Creating USCMS eee ceceeeee cent ee eeeeeeeeeeeeee cease ceeaaeeeceeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeaeeaaeeeesenaeeeeeaas 8 12 6 CHANGING USER Matas ecscsscceyiad sp yeveetens ceetenceaxceesdassesocebn scents sudebasaiuvens aieeensasceeeareceeanhenayeanatedes 812 DeletinGUSens iveecice le siees es weet E E pea ed asides iedeea aia painters 8 13 Closing the project sssi R E oben 9 Operating alarms sc s0s 35s choi Sede Seee aneneen EAE aE EENE aa a ES EEEE teased 9 1 OVGIVIOW cessa aa E E E E E O E oie 9 2 Recognizing pending alarms 222 c cceeccececeececeteseeneetedeaeeneceeneetesen
263. nction keys on Mobile Panel 277 8 for project specific applications Use labeling strips to do so NOTICE Do not write on the keyboard to label the function keys Printing labeling strips WinCC flexible comes with a range of labeling strip templates You will find further information regarding the location of the templates in the WinCC Online Help Any printable and writable foil can be used as labeling strips Use transparent foil so that the LEDs of the function keys can be seen Permitted thickness of the labeling strip 0 13 mm Paper should not be used as labeling strips Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 106 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Operator controls and displays 5 5 Labeling the function keys on Mobile Panel 277 8 Labeling strip dimensions Right labeling strip 2x 45 All specifications in mm Left labeling strip 2x 45 Bottom labeling strip 2x 45 6 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 107 Operator controls and displays 5 5 Labeling the function keys on Mobile Panel 277 8 Procedure for attaching labeling strips The following steps apply for the initial attaching of labeling strips Proceed as follows 1 Lay the Mobile Panel 277 on its back 2 Remove the sticker from the cover cap 7F7 o 3 Unscrew both cover caps 4 Pull the labeling strips out of the guides
264. nder Available options Set Transfer mode on the HMI device If automatic transfer mode is enabled on the HMI device the device automatically sets Transfer mode when the installation of an option is initiated 8 Start the installation of the option in ProSave with the gt gt button 9 Follow the instructions in ProSave A status display appears indicating the progress of the installation The option has now been installed on the HMI device Procedure for removing an option Proceed as follows 184 ON DOO FW DY From the Windows Start menu start ProSave on the PC Select the HMI device type in the General tab Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the PC Set the connection parameters Select the Options tab Press the Device status button to update the display Select the desired option under Installed options Set Transfer mode on the HMI device If automatic transfer mode is enabled on the HMI device the device automatically sets Transfer mode when the removal of an option is initiated Start the removal of the option in ProSave with the lt lt button Follow the instructions in ProSave A status display appears indicating the progress of the removal Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Commissioning a project 7 9 Transferring and transferring license keys Result The option has now
265. nditions comply with the following standards e IEC 60721 3 3 Class 3K7 for storage e IEC 60721 3 2 Class 2K4 for transport The mechanical conditions are compliant with IEC 60721 3 2 Class 2M2 The following table shows the transportation and storage conditions for the HMI device Type of condition Permitted range Drop test in transport package lt 1m Temperature From 20 to 60 C Atmospheric pressure From 1080 hPa to 660 hPa corresponds to an elevation 1000 to 3 500 m Relative humidity From 10 to 90 without condensation Sinusoidal vibration in accordance with 5 Hz to 8 4 Hz 3 5 mm IEC 60068 2 6 8 4 to 500 Hz 9 8 m s Shock in accordance with IEC 60068 2 29 250 m s2 6 ms 1000 shocks The following table shows the transportation and storage conditions for the terminal device Type of condition Permitted range Drop test in transport package lt 1m Temperature From 20 to 70 C Atmospheric pressure From 1080 hPa to 660 hPa corresponds to an elevation 1000 to 3 500 m Relative humidity From 35 to 85 without condensation Sinusoidal vibration in accordance with 5 Hz to 8 4 Hz 3 5 mm IEC 60068 2 6 8 4 to 500 Hz 9 8 m s2 Shock in accordance with IEC 60068 2 29 250 m s2 6 ms 1000 shocks NOTICE In the following cases ensure that no moisture can settle on or in the HMI device dew e Transportation of the HMI device in low temperatures e Un
266. necting the PROFINET data cables at E E O Assignment of 4 pin fast connector Pin Assignment 1 RD 2 TD 3 RD 4 TD Terminal strip 1 for power supply 3 pin Assignment of 3 pin terminal strip 1 Pin Power supply 1 PE 2 M24 3 P24 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 275 Technical specifications 12 6 Port assignment on the connection box DP and connection box PN 12 6 Port assignment on the connection box DP and connection box PN Terminal strip 2 12 pin The safety and additional functions are connected to this terminal strip The terminal strip has a mechanical coding in order to prevent mix up with terminal strip 1 Assignment of terminal strip 2 10 11 12 1 Active if Emergency Stop pressed 2 Active if Mobile panel connected Connection box Plus STOP13 STOP14 STOP23 STOP24 CTL31 1 CTL32 1 PRESENT31 2 PRESENT32 ENABLE2 ENABLE1 ENABLE1 ENABLE2 Connection box Basic Circuit STOP13 STOP button STOP14 See also post connectors STOP23 STOP24 n c PLC accompanying signals n c 24 VDC if active n C Enabling button See also post connectors and connection examples The STOP button pressed signal is not available on the connection box Basic The STOP button pressed signal has no error detection and therefore must not be used for safety critical applications 276 Mobile Panel 27
267. nection box Plus With the connection box the signals control the Stop or Emergency Stop circuits of the plant or machine When the HMI device is not connected the Stop or Emergency Stop circuit is closed e Connection box Basic With the connection box Basic the signals of the Stop or Emergency Stop circuit are controlled via the STOP button When the Mobile Panel 277 is not connected the Stop or Emergency Stop circuits of the plant or machine are open Stop loop through 40 The Stop or Emergency Stop circuit of the system or machine is looped through the connection box Plus and not interrupted The Stop or Emergency Stop circuit is interrupted in the following cases e The Stop button is pressed when the Mobile Panel 277 is connected e A Mobile Panel 277 with pressed STOP button is connected This functionality is only available in the connection box Plus Awarnine HMI device with STOP button If the HMI device is equipped with a STOP button and is not connected to the connection box a Stop cannot be initiated using the HMI device The STOP button of the HMI device is then ineffective Install stationary Emergency Stop buttons that are available at all times in the system Category 0 or 1 Stop If a Category 0 or 1 Stop circuit is implemented the stop function must be in effect regardless of the operating mode A Category 0 Stop must have precedence The release of a STOP button may not cause a hazardous situation s
268. ned by the on ess i When the server certificate is rejected Windows operating system may not be displayed Certificate signed by an unknown CA for example An error has occurred WININET DLL 9 y Kea returns the following error Number 12055 e Either ignore this item in your project or Text HTTP lt no error text available gt e Install a certificate that has been signed with a root certificate known to the client computer The date of the certificate is invalid e Either ignore this item in your project or e Install a certificate with a valid date on the server Invalid CN Common Name or Computer Name e Either ignore this item in your project or e Install a certificate with a name that corresponds to that of the server address 230203 Although a connection can be made to the server Error 503 Service unavailable the HTTP server refuses to connect because Check that WinCC flexible Runtime is running on the e WinCC flexible Runtime is not running on the server and the HTTP channel is supported server or e The HTTP channel is not supported 503 Service unavailable Other errors can only occur if the Webserver does not support the HTTP channel The language of the alarm text depends on the Webserver Data is not exchanged 230301 An internal error has occurred An English text explains the error in more detail This may be caused by insufficient memory OCX does not work 230302 The name of the remote server can
269. nel under Set PG PC interface If several masters are connected to the network enable these Do not change any settings for this will cause bus errors 140011 No tag updating or writing is executed because Check the connection and that the communication communication is down partner is switched on 140012 There is an initialization problem e g when WinCC Restart the HMI device flexible Runtime was closed in Task Manager Or Or Run WinCC flexible Runtime then start your other Another application e g STEP7 with different bus applications parameters is active and the driver cannot be started with the new bus parameters transmission rate for example 140013 The MPI cable is disconnected and thus there is Check the connections no power supply 140014 The configured bus address is in already in use by Edit the HMI device address in the PLC configuration another application 140015 Wrong transmission rate Correct the relevant parameters Or Faulty bus parameters e g HSA Or OP address gt HSA or Wrong interrupt vector interrupt does not arrive at the driver 140016 The hardware does not support the configured Change the interrupt number interrupt 140017 The set interrupt is in use by another driver Change the interrupt number 140018 The consistency check was disabled by SIMOTION Enable the consistency check with SIMOTION Scout Scout Only a corresponding note appears and once again download the project to the PL
270. nfiguring PC to the HMI device when at least one of the data channels is enabled on the HMI device Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 145 Configuring the operating system 6 7 Communication settings Requirements Procedure 146 3 You have opened the Transfer Settings dialog box by pressing the Transfer Settings 1 icon Transfer Settings Channel Directories l Channel 1 Serial Enable Channel ETHERNET x V Enable Channel _ Remote Control advanced G Group for data channel 1 Channel 1 Group for data channel 2 Channel 2 Button for the dialog MPI DP Transfer Settings or Network and Dial Up Connections Note Remote Control for channel 1 Only select the Remote Control check box in the Channel 1 group if serial transfer is in progress Clear the check box before changing to Online mode Proceed as follows 1 You can clear the required data channel by activating the associated Enable Channel check box in the Channel 1 or Channel 2 group In the Channel 1 group the RS 422 RS 485 port is configured for the serial data transfer Activate the Enable Channel check box to enable the data channel Deactivate the Enable Channel check box to lock the data channel 2 Enable automatic transfer by activating the respective Remote Control check box in the Channel
271. nging Password Protection 6 4 Changing Password Protection Introduction You can protect the Control Panel and Windows CE taskbar with a password Requirements You have opened the Password Properties dialog box by pressing the Password icon Password Properties Password Settings Password Password m O Confirm password ____ _ 2 Password text box Text box for entering the password a second time NOTICE If the password is no longer available you cannot do the following until you have updated the operating system e Making changes to the Control Panel e Operating the Windows CE task bar All data on the HMI device will be overwritten when you update the operating system Procedure for activating password protection Proceed as follows 1 Enter a password in the Password text box 2 Repeat the password entry in the Confirm Password text box 3 Confirm your entries The dialog closes NOTICE The following characters cannot be used in passwords e Blank e Special characters Result You cannot open the Control Panel or Windows CE taskbar without entering a password Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 128 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Contiguring the operating system 6 5 Changing HMI device settings Procedure for deactivating password protection Proceed as follows 1 Delete the entries in the Passwo
272. nnadennaanannaneennana a 54 Setting the box ID at the connection DOX cece cece cece ceeeetecneeceeeneetecnaeeaaeeeeeeeesessaeesaeseenaeeeas 56 Stripping the Insulation of Cables cccccececeeeeceecneceeeeeeeceaeceeeeeesecacaeeeeeeseceeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeea 58 Connecting the equipotential bonding circuit eeeesseesssseseereerrrneseernesrunesteranarrneerennaarennasenneaenae k Connecting the PLC ocersccciaroreoriiia tor iia Eeri EAER E E ia Connecting a Configuring PG siisii Aa a A AN a A AEA A Connecting a printer to a connection box PN s sssssssissnsrssssnrintnntntnsintnnnntnntnnnrnntnnnn nn nnene enen 66 Conmecting the Power SUPPLY cessas E nasaed cet satecensst celansneeenspansnaee Connecting Mobile Panel 277 lt rrrssai israe aa aa e a e EEA a EA EA anaana ASAN 69 Connecting the HMI eViCC cece ccccte cece cneeeeceeceeeeeeeesecseseecaeenecnsecieeseseeeeiasiecaeeeneenieens 69 Opening and Closing the Terminal Compartment 00 cccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseneaeeeseeaeeeeeenaees 69 Mobile Paneli2 0 1 POPS soscc cshscwaptivsenuisaceespetebecossbberis cplvsgessunudeaselugeesnlatar AEA EA EEA EEEa EEES 11 Connecting a Configuring PC eee eeeeeeeeeeenee ee eeenneeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeeeesaaeeeeeaeeeseeeeesseaeeesseeeeeteeeneaes 14 Connecting the Connecting Cable cccccsccccecesececceeteseceeesesceeeenseceeenseeeenenseeeenseeeeeeeneeeeenseneeaeees Switching on and testing the HMI d
273. not be resolved Check the configured server address The attempt to connect failed Check whether the DNS service is available on the network 230303 The remote server is not running on the addressed Check the configured server address computer Check whether the remote server is running on the Wrong server address target computer The attempt to connect failed 230304 The remote server on the addressed computer is Use a compatible remote server incompatible with VNCOCX The attempt to connect failed Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0AB0 305 Appendix A 2 System alarms Number 230305 Effect causes The authentication has failed because the password is incorrect The attempt to connect failed Remedy Configure the correct password 230306 Error in the connection to the remote server This may occur as a result of network problems The attempt to connect failed Check whether e The bus cable is plugged in e There are network problems 230307 The connection to the remote server was shut down because e The remote server was shut down or e The user instructed the server to close all connections The connection is closed 230308 This alarm provides information on the connection status An attempt is made to connect 240000 Authorization alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 24000
274. ns 0 Il l 0 ll Key operated switch settings The key can be removed in the switch setting 0 Remove the key after use This avoids possible damage to the key if the HMI device falls down Note The key to the key operated switch is supplied together with the HMI device The key does not have an HMl specific coding i e you can use it for any Mobile Panel 277 8 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 87 Operator contro s and displays 5 2 Operator controls of Mobile Panel 277 8 See also 5 2 5 Introduction Operation 88 Mobile Panel 277 8 Page 79 Enabling Switch The enabling equipment consists of two enabling buttons which are installed on the left and right side of the Mobile Panel 277 The switch setting of the two enabling buttons is determined by electrical momentary contact switches The associated evaluation logic is dual channel This means one channel processes the enabling button information digitally and the second channel in analog fashion This helps with signal security diversity NOTICE AND linking is not permitted Both channels can run staggered signals This is why both channels should not be linked using the Boolean operator AND but only with an OR The figure below shows the enabling button Zustimmtaster You only have to activate one enabling button It is not possible for the PLC to eva
275. ns one after another in the the enabling buttons must be checked for Enable and Panic positions functionality 350008 The wrong number of fail safe buttons was Change the number of fail safe buttons in the project configured No PROFIsafe connection 350009 The device is in Override mode Exit Override mode It may no longer be possible to detect the location because transponder detection fails 350010 Internal error The device has no fail safe buttons Send the device back Worldwide contact person Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 316 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Appendix A 3 Things to remember during configuration A 3 Things to remember during configuration A 3 1 Configuring the terminal ID A 3 1 1 Overview Introduction You can divide a system into several zones or functional areas by using several connection boxes For this purpose it may be necessary for different system screens to be displayed depending on the connection box used This is achieved by means of connection point recognition Note The following sections are intended for the configuration engineer of the HMI device Note If the same screens and functions are used predominantly for all PLCs and the PLCs are of the same type the configuration can be designed in such a way that only one PLC connection is configured The configuration engineer can enable switching between various PLCs by means of a control object
276. ntrolling the LEDs of the function keys by means of system functions 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeees 95 Evaluating the handwheel by means of system functions eee eeeeeeeeeteeeeeeteee ee taeeeetnaeeeeee 96 Evaluating the key operated switch by means of system functions eceeeeeteee entre ee ttteeeees 96 Controlling and evaluating the illuminated pushbutton by means of system functions 9 Operator controls of Mobile Panel 277 10 cc ccc ceccccecesecneeneeeecteceesaeeeeesecaseasesseesnaseaseaees 98 STOP DUUOM siisii uann era edie ieee ee ae eee Ane anche 98 OVI E Vasdeces shaaontiveabeea se A dasa aedtnlctna catia begs 98 Safety Functions of the STOP Button 0 0 0 cece ccecseesecnecnseeseenecnecnaeeseenesnecnseseseeseaeeeeaee 100 Enabling SWIG sanes eae EE O A AE a Ea 101 Configuring the evaluation of Operator controls ce eeeee cece ee eeeeeeeeceaeeeseeaaeeeeeaeeeesenaeeeeeaaes 104 OW GIMIGW gins Secreta Ries tM uaa cals aed ba wt aca E alah ced stidae aa aaea aE 104 Evaluating operator controls as direct keys 00 eee ceeeeeeeeeeceeneeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeessaeeesetnaeeeentaneeaes 104 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO Table of contents 5 4 USING MEMO CAPOS senusien oann EEA SE ESE A E 5 5 Labeling the function keys on Mobile Panel 277 8 sssesessesssesrrsserrsserrssrrrrssrinssrerrssrernsne 5 6 Holding the Mobile Panel and attaching it to
277. o strip a PROFINET cable All specifications in mm 30 Note Use a stripping tool from the online catalog under http mall automation siemens com for quick stripping to the proper length Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Installation and connection 4 4 Connecting the connection box 4 4 5 Connecting the equipotential bonding circuit Potential differences Differences in potential between spatially separated system parts can lead to high equalizing currents via the data cables and therefore to the destruction of their ports This situation may arise if the cable shielding is terminated at both ends and grounded at different system parts Differences in potential may develop when a system is connected to different mains supplies General requirements for equipotential bonding Differences in potential must be reduced by means of equipotential bonding in order to ensure trouble free operation of the relevant components of the electronic system The following must therefore be observed when installing the equipotential bonding circuit e The effectiveness of equipotential bonding increases as the impedance of the equipotential bonding conductor decreases or as its cross section increases e If two parts of the system are connected to each other by means of shielded data cables and its shielding is connected at both ends with the grounding protective grounding
278. ome operations with the project may require in depth knowledge about the specific plant on the part of the operator Proceed with caution for example when you use jog mode Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation Operation feedback from operator controls The HMI device provides optical feedback as soon as it detects that an operator control has been selected The operator control receives the focus and is selected This selection is independent of any communication with the PLC Therefore this selection does not indicate whether the relevant action is actually executed or not The configuration engineer can also configure the selection of an operator control so that it deviates from the standard Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 190 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Operating a project 8 1 Overview Optical feedback from operator controls The type of optical feedback depends on the operator control e Buttons The HMI device outputs different views of the Pressed and Unpressed states provided the configuration engineer has configured a 3D effect Pressed state a Unpressed state The configuration engineer determines the appearance of a marked field for example line width and color for the focus e Invisible buttons By default invisible buttons are not displayed as presse
279. ommand in the menu Project gt Transfer in WinCC flexible The Communication Settings dialog opens 2 Select the type of HMI device 3 Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the configuring PC then set NO on fF the connection parameters Close the dialog with OK Select the Options command in the menu Project gt Transfer in WinCC flexible Select the desired option under Available options Set Transfer mode on the HMI device If automatic transfer mode is enabled on the HMI device the device automatically sets Transfer mode when the installation of an option is initiated Start the installation of the option in WinCC flexible on the configuring PC with the gt gt button Follow the instructions in WinCC flexible A status display appears indicating the progress of the installation Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Commissioning a project Result 7 8 Installing and removing options The option has now been installed on the HMI device Procedure for removing an option Proceed as follows 1 On the configuring PC select the Communication settings command in the menu Project gt Transfer in WinCC flexible The Communication Settings dialog opens 2 Select the type of HMI device oO N On Ff Result Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the configuring PC then
280. on 4 4 Connecting the connection box 4 4 8 Connecting a printer to a connection box PN Introduction You can connect a printer to the connection box PN via PROFINET The current list available on the Internet at http aan automation siemens comiWWiview en 4 1376409 Observe the supplied printer documentation when you connect the printer Configuration diagram The following figure shows the connection between the connection box PN and a printer Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 66 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO nstallation and connection 4 4 Connecting the connection box 4 4 9 Connecting the Power Supply Introduction The supply voltage for the HMI device is connected to a terminal strip in the connection box The terminal block is designed for cables with a maximum cross section of 1 5 mm Connect the protective conductor connection of the connection box with the cabinet casing or equipotential bonding Note Reverse polarity protection The connection box has reverse polarity protection Connection graphic The following figure shows the connection of the power supply to the connection box DP MOO000 mMOOO00 MOOO00 MOOO00 MOO0O000 mMOOOO0G Pe M Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO 67 Installation and connection 4 4 Connecting the connection box Meaning of the abbreviations used in the figure
281. on LED Memory management 119 Mobile Panel Attaching Design variations 17 Enabling button 88 101 Front view Information Mounting position 47 Operating 109 Overall dimensions 257 266 18 Replugging 24 Side view STOP button 8 Switching on Testing 77 Mobile Panel 277 Applications 15 Front view Mode Transfer Monitor setting Changing 119 Monitoring device SIRIUS 3TK2841 Monitoring mode Sm rtClient view Mounting location Wall holder Mounting position Connection box Mobile Panel Wall holder Mouse properties 119 MPI Configuration diagram 64 Setting 144 B4 Strip cable 58 Multi key operation 190 336 N Name server 152 Setting Network Configure Logon data Set up 149 Setting 152 Network amp dial up connections 119 Network ID 119 Network operation Device name Options 120 Nominal voltage 50 Number format Numerical Screen keyboard Numerical value Changing Decimal places 196 Display format 195 Entering 196 Limit value test O Offices 7 Offline Operating mode 166 Recipe tag 238 Test Online Operating mode Recipe tag 238 Test OP properties Device Memory monitoring Persistent storage Touch 126 Open Connection box 55 Loader open loop control time dependent reaction 131 Open loop control Configuration graphic 61 Operating Control Panel Enabling button 88 Feedback 190 Handwheel 85
282. on of the ruler can also be changed by means of touching and dragging the ruler on the touch screen Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0AB0 Operating a project 8 10 Operating the status force 8 10 1 Overview 8 10 Operating the status force Application You read or write access values of the connected PLC directly with status force Status force allows you to monitor or change addresses of the PLC program etc You don t need to connect an additional programming device or additional PC to the PLC Note Status force can only be used in combination with SIMATIC S5 or SIMATIC S7 Layout The layout of status force depends on the configuration The figure shows the general layout of status force A value can be monitored or controlled on every line Status force example The configuration engineer specifies which columns appear in status force The table shows the significance of all configurable columns Column Connection Functions The PLC whose address ranges must be displayed Type DB Number Offset Bit The address range of the value Data Type Format The data type of the value Status Value The value read from the specified address Control Value The value to be written to the specified address Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation Mobile Panel 277 Wi
283. onal removal of the connecting cable is now safely prevented Procedure for removing the connector Proceed as follows 1 Pull back the outer bushing The connector lock is released when you slide back the bushing You can now remove the connection cable Do not tilt the connector when removing it If you do not intend to use the Mobile Panel 277 with a different connection box place the Mobile Panel 277 safely in its wall holder Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 76 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Installation and connection 4 6 Switching on and testing the HMI device 4 6 Switching on and testing the HMI device Procedure Proceed as follows 1 Switch on the power supply The display lights up after power is switched on A progress bar is displayed during startup If the HMI device does not start it is possible the wires on the terminal block have been crossed Check the connected wires and change the connections if necessary The loader is displayed once the operating system has started Transfer Start Control Panel Taskbar fell The HMI device automatically switches to Transfer mode during initial startup under the following conditions No project is loaded on the device Atleast one data channel has been configured During this process the following dialog appears Connecting to host Cancel 2 Press Cancel to stop the transfer
284. one 49 911 895 3200 Internet http www sitrain com Technical Support Technical support for all SIMATIC products is available NA tne NVeb torm to reque JOpOoOr ttp www siemens com automation support request Phone 49 180 5050 222 Fax 49 180 5050 223 echnical support on the Internet at ou will find more information on ou ttp support automation siemens com Service amp Support on the Internet Service amp Support provide through online services at additional comprehensive information on SIMATIC products http support automation siemens com e The newsletter offers you the latest information about your products e A large document base is available using our Service amp Support search engine e A forum for global exchange of information by users and experts e Current product information FAQs and downloads e You local representative e Information about on site services repairs spare parts and more Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO 7 Preface Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 8 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Table of contents PHOT ACC E E EEE T E E E E 1 OVOM OW iisa ee ee a ee tee eee eee 1 1 Product OVERVICW assume aa en eteas lotta cal ted ook dened adeues a a a a adaa Aaaa e a aia 1 2 Desigwof the AMI doviCeksrscposnan a bouitetdanneraelnaunaadaeen 1 2 1 OVEVIOW ss ipes eaten aa eal chast
285. onnection box Plus the following circuit diagram applies to the connection box Basic STOP1 STOP2 Mobile Panel PRESENT PRESENT lt _ E Connecting cables Terminal strip 2 12 pin o STOP13 STOP14 STOP23 24 V STOP24 o CTRL31 o CTRL32 PRESENT31 o PRESENT32 Power supply switched off See also Port assignment on the connection box DP Page 272 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 281 Technical specifications 12 7 Wiring Examples for Enabling Switch and STOP Button 12 7 Wiring Examples for Enabling Switch and STOP Button Introduction Connection 282 This chapter contains connection examples for enable and STOP buttons corresponding to safety category 3 in accordance with EN 954 1 Note In order to guarantee safety category 3 in accordance with EN 954 1 please also consider the operating instructions of the monitoring device used Enabling button with evaluation device The following figure shows the connection of an evaluating device to the enabling button of the mobile panel Enabling button left Enabling button right 3 stage 2 circuit 3 stage 2 circuit 123 321 oo Circuit 1 oo Yoo 7e Ka Cirouit 2 ee Mobile Panel Evaluation electronics wa ZS Circuit 1 ZX Circuit 2 Connection cable Connection box Plus or connection box KA Evaluation device for KA KB enabling button e KB Ce oe
286. ons 4 5 2 Opening and Closing the Terminal Compartment Introduction Observe the following information before you open the connection box CAUTION Malfunctions If the HMI device is placed facing down on its front the STOP button can be activated Other operating elements key operated switch illuminated pushbutton can be activated unintentionally thus causing malfunctions When you open the terminal compartment you must remove the connecting cable belonging to the Mobile Panel 277 from the connection box Mobile panel with rechargeable battery Note that a mobile panel with inserted rechargeable battery will not switch off before approx 10 minutes have elapsed if a project is running ESD guideline Note the ESD instructions Note Pay attention to cleanliness Foreign bodies or liquids must not come into contact with the printed circuit board or penetrate the inside of the HMI device Place the HMI device with the front side facing down on a flat clean surface to protect against damage Requirements Cross head screwdriver size 2 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO 69 nstallation and connection 4 5 Connecting Mobile Panel 277 Procedure This section describes how to open and close the connection box based on the example of Mobile Panel 277 8 Cover Screws on the cover Cable inlet Plugs 000 Proceed as follows 1 Unscr
287. ons Displaying infotext for an alarm Process alarm Acknowledge alarm Select the next or previous alarm in the list BHEE Extended alarm view Scroll one page up or down a 12 04 59 Motor 23 too hot Date Status 19 04 2005 K The buttons have the following functions Functions Displaying infotext for an alarm Process alarm Acknowledge alarm 224 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Operating alarms 9 3 Displaying alarms Changing the column sequence and sorting in the extended alarm view Depending on the configuration you can change the column sequence and sorting order on HMI devices with touch operation e Change column sequence Touch the column header which you wish to exchange with a different column header Keeping the touch screen pressed move the column heading to the column heading you wish to exchange it with e Change sorting order To change the sorting order of the alarms touch the respective column header on the touch screen Alarm class layout The various alarm classes are identified in order to distinguish between them in the alarm view Symbol Alarm class Error Without a symbol Operation Symbol depending on the configuration User defined alarm classes S7 SIMATIC or SIMOTION diagnostic alarms System The configuration engineer ca
288. ontrol twice in succession caution Do not use any pointed or sharp objects when operating the touch screen Otherwise this may damage the plastic membrane of the touch screen e External operator controls The following operator controls can be connected externally External keyboard connected via USB External mouse connected via USB The usage of external control elements is recommended for commissioning Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 189 Operating a project 8 1 Overview Operating a project with an external keyboard An external keyboard can be used to operate a project in exactly the same way as with the HMI keyboard or screen keyboard Note The function keys of the external keyboard are disabled Use other keys on the external keyboard which correspond to the HMI device keys Operating a project with an external mouse An external mouse can be used to operate a project in exactly the same way as with the HMI touch screen Click the described operator controls with the mouse Unintentional actions caution Do not carry out several operations simultaneously You may otherwise trigger unintentional actions e With touch control Always touch only one operator control on the screen e With key operation via an external keyboard Do not press more than two keys simultaneously Observing the plant documentation S
289. osition Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0AB0 83 Operator controls and displays 5 2 Operator controls of Mobile Panel 277 8 5 2 1 2 84 Safety Functions of the STOP Button The STOP button on the Mobile Panel 277 brings about a safety related Stop of the system being monitored in accordance with EN 60204 1 1997 Section 9 2 5 3 You have the option of implementing a Category 0 1 or 2 Stop function in accordance with EN 60204 1 1997 Section 9 2 2 The stop function category must be selected on the basis of a risk assessment The Mobile Panel 277 s Stop function can therefore be used as a reliable machine stop as well as for looping in the Emergency Stop circuit of the system to be monitored The signals of the STOP button are wired differently in the two versions of the connection box In the connection box Plus the signals control the Stop or Emergency Stop circuit of the system being monitored If the Mobile Panel 277 is not connected the Stop or Emergency Stop circuit is closed In the connection box Basic on the other hand the signals of the Stop or Emergency Stop circuit are fed via the STOP button If the Mobile Panel 277 is not connected the Stop or Emergency Stop circuit of the system being monitored is open The term Stop loop through has the following meaning The Stop or Emergency Stop circuit of the system or machine is looped through the connection box Plus
290. pe view A dialog box opens in which the name is entered The displayed recipe data record is deleted The values of the recipe view are synchronized with the associated recipe tags The values changed during editing are written to the associated recipe tags Subsequently all the values of the tags are read out and updated in the table The recipe values from the PLC are displayed in the recipe view ee eee ee Operating the recipe screen The values of the set recipe data record displayed in the recipe view are transferred to the PLC You operate the recipes in a recipe screen with the operator controls provided by the configuration engineer Please refer to your system documentation to check whether additional information on this subject is available there 10 6 2 Creating a recipe data record Introduction You create a new recipe data record by modifying an existing record You then save the modified data record under a new name Requirements A screen with a recipe view is displayed Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 239 Operating recipes 10 6 Operating the recipe view Procedure Result See also Proceed as follows 1 If the recipe view contains several recipes Select the recipe for which you want to create a new recipe data record Touch aj A new recipe data record with the next available number is created If
291. perating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Operator controls and displays 5 2 Operator controls of Mobile Panel 277 8 5 2 2 Handwheel Introduction The handwheel is an optional operator control for Mobile Panel 277 8 The handwheel can be turned without a stop and does not have a zero position soe eg eg Handwheel with recess Operation To facilitate operation the handwheel has a small recess See also Mobile Panel 277 8 Page 79 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 85 Operator contro s and displays 5 2 Operator controls of Mobile Panel 277 8 5 2 3 Illuminated Pushbutton Introduction The illuminated pushbuttons are optional operator controls for Mobile Panel 277 8 and can be used for high speed digital input SIEMENS Illuminated pushbutton Function principle The illuminated pushbuttons are momentary action switches without latching mechanism See also Mobile Panel 277 8 Page 79 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 86 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Operator controls and displays 5 2 Operator controls of Mobile Panel 277 8 5 2 4 Key operated Switch Introduction The key operated switch is an optional operator control for Mobile Panel 277 8 and is used to lock functions which can be triggered by means of the HMI device Key operated switch Operation The key operated switch has three positio
292. pond is defective etc e The wrong port is used for the connection e System overload e The cable is plugged in e The PLC is OK e The correct port is used Restart the system if the system alarm persists Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO 309 Appendix A 2 System alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 280002 The connection used requires a function block in the PLC The function block has responded Communication is now enabled 280003 The connection used requires a function block in Check whether the PLC e The cable is plugged in The function block has not responded e The PLC is OK e The correct port is used Restart the system if the system alarm persists Remedy depends on the error code 1 The function block must set the COM bit in the response container 2 The function block must not set the ERROR bit in the response container 3 The function block must respond within the specified time timeout 4 Go online to the PLC 280004 The connection to the PLC is interrupted There is Check the connection parameters in WinCC flexible no data exchange at present Ensure that the cable is plugged in the PLC is operational the correct port is being used Restart the system if the system alarm persists 290000 Recipe system alarms Number 290000 Effect causes The recipe tag could not be read or written It is assign
293. port 269 USB socket 270 PLC Connecting 61 Number 30 Protocol 30 Reading recipe data record 249 Transferring recipe data record 244 PLC_User 218 Pocket Internet Explorer Ports Configuring Mobile Panel 277 265 266 Power failure 174 Power supply Cable a O Connection graphic Precautions Electrostatic discharge Printer Configuration diagram b6 Connecting Setting Printer connection Setting Printer properties 119 Printing Labeling strips Via network printer 150 Process control phase 337 Index Production sequence Manual PROFIBUS DP 1 Configuration diagram 64 Setting Strip cable 58 PROFINET Addressing Strip cable PROFINET IO Disabling direct cove ts Enabling direct A Safety matucton 63 Setting 1 Program memory S5 Compress roy Project Closing Offline na haa Operating 189 Reuse Testing ee ee Proper use Bd Protective cover Protocol ie 30 Seven 8 ise Setting 119 R Radiation High frequency 34 Radio interference 37 Emission Reading Recipe data record Reading out Recipe data record Real time clock Internal Rear view Rechargeable sato 2 Safety instruction State 338 Field of application 229 Functional scope 28 Recipe screen 234 Recipe view 234 Synchronizing tags 242 Recipe data record Su aa TAD d a Synchronize with aa Transferring to PLC Recipe list 245 Recipe m
294. r e For the automatic reduction in the screen s backlighting When you do not undertake an operation within the configured interval the configured function will be activated automatically The screen saver and the reduced screen backlighting functions are switched back off by means of the following actions e By pressing any key e By touching the touch screen The function associated to the key or button will not be executed by this NOTICE Deterioration of the backlight brightness The brightness of the backlighting decreases incrementally during its operational life In order to increase the operational lifetime of the backlighting activate the backlighting reduction Burn in effects The prolonged display of screen contents can occasionally lead to a burn in effect in the background This burn in effect automatically disappears after a certain amount of time for example after the screensaver was activated The longer the same content is displayed on the screen the longer it will take for the burn in effect to disappear Generally you should always activate the screen saver When the screen saver is active the backlighting is reduced at the same time Requirements You have opened the Screensaver dialog box by pressing the ScreenSaver icon Screensaver OK Dim Backlight becomes active after ja LY minutes l Screensaver becomes active after 0 af O Standard _ Blank Screen Enter a
295. ransfer is completed successfully the project can be found on the HMI device The transferred project is then started automatically Procedure 1 2 3 4 5 6 Result See also Operating modes Page 166 Data Transmission Options Page 167 Configuring the data channel Page 145 Overview Page 168 7 5 4 Starting backtransfer Requirements No project is open on the configuring PC in WinCC flexible The HMI device is connected to this configuring PC The data channel is configured on the HMI device The HMI device is in Transfer mode The memory card containing the compressed project file is inserted into the HMI device Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 171 Commissioning a project 7 5 Transfer Procedure Result Proceed as follows 1 On the configuring PC select the Communication settings command in the menu Project gt Transfer in WinCC flexible The Communication Settings dialog opens 2 Select the type of HMI device 3 Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the configuring PC Set the connection parameters 4 Close the dialog with OK 5 Select the Transfer gt Backtransfer command in the Project menu The Backtransfer dialog opens Click OK to start the backtransfer process The configuring PC checks the connection to the HMI device The compressed project file is transferred back from th
296. rd and Confirm password text boxes 2 Confirm your entries The dialog closes Result Password protection for the Control Panel and Windows CE taskbar is disabled 6 5 Changing HMI device settings 6 5 1 Setting the date and time Introduction You can set the date and time on the HMI device The HMI must be restarted in the following cases e You have changed the time zone setting e You have changed the Daylight savings time currently in effect check box setting Requirements 1k You have opened the Date Time Properties dialog with the Date Time Properties icon Date Time Properties OK Date Time Time Zone cur Greenwich Mean Time Dublin Edinb Ly Current Time Ry Februar 2007 MDMDFS 5S 09 49 35 29 30 31 123 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 RG 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 aw J Daylight savings time l currently in effect Time zone selection box Text box for the time Daylight savings check box Date selection box Button for applying changes Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 129 Configuring the operating system 6 5 Changing HMI device settings Procedure Result Internal clock 130 Proceed as follows Select the appropriate time zone for the HMI device from the Time Zone selection box Touch the Apply
297. re is enough space on the server exporting the log and it you have permission to create the log file 80047 The log could not be read while exporting it Check whether the storage medium is correctly inserted 80049 The log could not be renamed while preparing to Check whether the storage medium is correctly export it inserted and if there is sufficient space on the medium The job can not be completed 80050 The log which shall be exported is not closed Make sure the CloseAll Logs system function is The job can not be completed called before using the ExportLog system function Change the configuration as required 90000 FDA alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 90024 No operator actions can be logged due to lack of Make more space available by inserting an empty space on the storage medium for log The operator storage medium or swapping out the log files on the action will therefore not be executed server using ExportLog 90025 No user actions can be logged because of error Check whether the storage medium is correctly state of the archive Therefore the user action will inserted not be executed Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 294 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Appendix A 2 System alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 90026 No operator actions can be logged because the log Before further operator actions are carried out the log is
298. relevant documentation must be observed All names identified by are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described Since variance cannot be precluded entirely we cannot guarantee full consistency However the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions Siemens AG Order No 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Copyright Siemens AG 2008 Industry Sector 08 2008 Technical data subject to change Postfach 48 48 90026 N RNBERG GERMANY Preface Purpose of the operating instructions These operating instructions provide information for manuals derived from the requirements for mechanical engineering documentation according to DIN EN 62079 This information relates to the HMI device its place of use transportation storage installation use and maintenance Readership of these operating instructions Operators The operator operates and monitors the plant within the process control phase The following chapters are relevant to operators Overview Operator controls and displays Configuring the operating system Operating a project Operating alarm
299. resentation types Screen saver 120 1 Setting Search engine Internet Security settings 339 Index Security system Selection Operator controls 80 Service On the Internet j Service pack Set up Network 149 Setting Backlighting Box ID 57 Browser Character repeat 123 Date Date format Date Time 119 Delay time 120 Device name 120 Double click 125 E Mail E mail connection IP address Language MPI 119 Name server Network Number format Printer connection PROFIBUS PROFINET IO Proxy Regional data Screen saver Time Time format 132 Setting language Setting the station number 57 Settings Internet Language Regional S7 Transfer SIBE Switzerland Certification Service 35 Side view 18 19 258 Siemens HMI input panel options 119 Signal Mobile panel connected Simple alarm view 224 Simple recipe view 235 Menu commands Operator controls Simple user view 2 245 245 340 Slider control Sm rtClient view 209 210 Monitoring mode 2 Usage 209 SMTP server Software options 30 Sort order Alarm view Special operation Risk evaluation Specifications Supply voltage 265 Weight 267 268 Standard input unit 80 Start HMI device 138 Status control 207 Status Force Touch operation Stop Safety instruction 84 STOP button 40 84 98 Operating 82 84 Release 83 Release safety ins
300. rm is output when alarm number 290002 is Check the value range or type of the tag triggered more than five times In this case no further separate alarms are generated 290006 The threshold values configured for the tag have Observe the configured or current threshold values of been violated by values entered the tag 290007 There is a difference between the source and Insert the specified data recipe tag in the source target structure of the recipe currently being structure processed The target structure contains an additional data recipe tag which is not available in the source structure The data recipe tag specified is assigned its start value 290008 There is a difference between the source and Remove the specified data recipe tag in the specified target structure of the recipe currently being recipe from the project processed The source structure contains an additional data recipe tag which is not available in the target structure and therefore cannot be assigned The value is rejected 290010 The storage location configured for the recipe is not Check the configured storage location permitted Possible causes Illegal characters write protection data carrier out of space or does not exist 290011 The record with the specified number does not Check the source for the number constant or tag exist value 290012 The recipe with the specified number does not Check the source for the number constant or tag exist value 290013
301. rop down list box opens One One a Two Three w Symbolic I O field after touch example Procedure Proceed as follows 1 Touch the required operating element The drop down list box of the operating element opens Select land 4 to scroll in the drop down list box 2 Touch the required entry in the drop down list box The selected entry is accepted as an entry Result You have changed the symbolic value or entered a new one 8 4 6 Displaying infotext Purpose The configuration engineer uses infotext to provide additional information and operating instructions The configuration engineer can configure infotext on screens and operating elements The infotext of an I O field may contain for example information on the value to be entered Enter temperature setpoint for Tank_1 Range 40 80 C Infotext for an I O field example Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 199 Operating a project 8 4 Entering values using the touch screen Opening infotext for operating elements 1 Touch the required operating element The screen keyboard opens You can see from the appearance of the Help key whether infotext has been configured for the operating element or the current screen 2 Touch the Help key on the screen keyboard The infotext for the operating element is displayed If there is no infotext for the selected screen object the infotext for
302. rried out Switching states of the Stop or Emergency Stop circuit with connection box Basic The Stop or Emergency Stop circuit switching statuses for a connected Mobile Panel 277 with a STOP button and connection box Basic are Mobile Panel 277 STOP button Status of the Stop or Emergency Stop circuit Is connected Not pressed The Stop or Emergency Stop circuit remains closed Is connected Pressed The Stop or Emergency Stop circuit is open The system being monitored is shut down Is not connected The Stop or Emergency Stop circuit is open The system being monitored is shut down The stop circuit switch states for a connected Mobile Panel 277 without a STOP button and connection box Basic are Mobile Panel 277 STOP button Status of the Stop or Emergency Stop circuit Is connected Not available The Stop or Emergency Stop circuit remains closed Is not connected Not available The Stop or Emergency Stop circuit is open The system being monitored is shut down Awarnine Releasing the STOP button The following applies if you have shut down the monitored system You may only release the STOP button and restart the system being monitored under the following conditions e The reasons for the stop have been eliminated e A safe restart is possible Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 113 Operator controls and displays
303. s Operating recipes Backing up and restoring data Commissioning engineers The commissioning engineer integrates the HMI device into the plant and ensures proper functioning of the device for the process control phase The entire set of operating instructions is in principle relevant to the commissioning engineer Depending on the use of the HMI device however certain chapters may not be relevant to this engineer for example the chapter covering Maintenance and servicing Service technicians The service technician troubleshoots faults that occur during the process control phase The entire set of operating instructions is basically relevant to the service technician Depending on the use of the HMI device certain chapters may not be of relevance to the service technician for example the Maintenance and servicing chapter Maintenance technicians Maintenance technicians carry out routine maintenance work during the process control phase The chapter Maintenance and servicing is important for maintenance technicians All personnel operating the equipment must pay special attention to the chapter Safety instructions and general notes The help integrated in WinCC flexible the WinCC flexible Information System contains detailed information The information system contains instructions examples and reference information in electronic form Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV
304. s Project specific user groups are created by the configuration engineer The Administrators and PLC User groups are included in all projects by default User groups are assigned authorizations Authorization required for an operation is specifically defined for each individual object and function in the project Users and passwords Logoff times 212 Each user is assigned to exactly one user group The following people are allowed to create users and assign them passwords e The configuration engineer during configuration e The administrator on the HMI device e A user with user management authorization on the HMI device Irrespective of the user group each user is allowed to change his own password A logoff time is specified in the system for each user If the time between any two user actions such as entering a value or changing screens exceeds this logoff time the user is automatically logged off The user must then log on again to continue to operate objects assigned password protection Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Operating a project 8 12 Project security Backup and restore The user data is encrypted and saved on the HMI device to protect it from loss due to power failure The users passwords group assignments and logoff times set up on the HMI device can be backed up and restored This prevents you having to enter all of the data again on another
305. s e PE stands for protective conductor e M24 stands for ground e P24 stands for 24 VDC Please refer to the technical data for the supply voltage requirements Awarninc 24 VDC supply Personal injury and equipment damage can occur Configure the 24 VDC supply for the Mobile Panel 277 correctly otherwise components of your automation system can be damaged and persons may be injured Use only voltage generated as safety extra low voltage SELV for the 24V DC supply of the Mobile Panel 277 CAUTION Safety isolation Use only power supply units with safety isolation complying with IEC 60364 4 41 or HD 384 04 41 VDE 0100 Part 410 for example according to the PELV standard for the 24 VDC supply The supply voltage must be within the specified voltage range Malfunctions in the HMI device may otherwise result Applies to floating system design Connect the connection for GND 24 V from the 24 V power supply output to equipotential bonding for uniform reference potential Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 68 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Installation and connection 4 5 Connecting Mobile Panel 277 4 5 Connecting Mobile Panel 277 4 5 1 Connecting the HMI device Connecting the cables When connecting the cables ensure that the contact pins are not bent Secure the connectors with screws The pin assignment of the ports is described in the technical specificati
306. s 5 2 7 1 Overview Operator controls The following information can be transferred between the HMI device and the PLC e Direction pulses of the handwheel e Status of the function keys e Status of the key operated switch e State of the illuminated pushbuttons e State of the function keys and illuminated pushbutton LEDs There are two ways of transmitting information e Direct keys e System functions of WinCC flexible Note The following sections are intended for the configuration engineer of the HMI device Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO 91 Operator controls and displays 5 2 Operator controls of Mobile Panel 277 8 5 2 7 2 Evaluating operator controls as direct keys Introduction You can configure the operator controls of the HMI device as direct keys The states of the following operator controls are available directly in the I O area of the PLC e Direction pulses of the handwheel e The switching state of the function keys e The switching state of the key operated switch e The switching state of the illuminated pushbuttons Byte assignment The following figure shows the assignment of the keys inputs and LEDs outputs to the bytes in the PLC process image Check for additional information in your plant documentation if necessary Button bits LED bits G a o 7 N o D0 o 8 fafo sfe a an frol 9 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
307. s IP address 152 Evaluating Operator controls 80 Exporting Recipe data record Extended alarm view Extended user view F Fast connector Assignment 274 Feedback Optical Front view 17 19 257 Function Additional 29 Function keys Global function assignment Input via 201 Labeling 106 Local function assignment Function test 78 Functional scope Alarm buffer 334 ALARMS 27 Alarms Graphics list Infotext Limit value monitoring 27 Log 28 ae screen 28 Tag Text list G Gauge Graphics list Functional scope H Handwheel Application Evaluate incremental values 96 Operating Reaction time 95 High frequency radiation 34 HMI device Cold restart 138 Information 119 Ports 72 oe Specifications 265 Switch off Technical data HMI Input Panel Options Home page Internet Host cable Safety instruction 75 Identification 153 IF1 port Assignment 273 Illuminated pushbutton Application Bit assignment Function principle Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0AB0 Index Importing Certificate Recipe data record Infotext Display 199 59 Functional scope Input unit 80 Specifications 266 Technical data 264 Installation Electrical EMC compliant Installing ron ia Interference Pulse shaped 4 Sinusoidal 42 che Interlocking mechanism Internal clock 130 130
308. s in mind 2 7 Enabling Switch Introduction The enabling device comprises the two enabling buttons mounted on both sides of the Mobile Panel 277 Numerically controlled machines and systems are equipped with the operating modes Automatic mode and Special operation Safety is ensured in automatic mode by means of closed isolating protective devices and or with functional non isolating protective devices that block access In special operation safety has to be ensured in a different manner than in automatic mode In special operation mode the danger zones of the machine or system are entered where controlled movements have to be possible Special operation 38 A reduced speed on the machine or in the system has to be specified for special operation based on the risk assessment An action must be possible only when the enabling device is activated The operator must have the necessary qualifications and be acquainted with the details of the intended application Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Safety instructions and general notes 2 7 Enabling Switch Safety instructions The safety related aspects of the velocity reduction control and those for the enabling device are designed in such a way that they satisfy the EN 954 1 safety category determined by the risk analysis Safety Category 3 in accordance with EN 954 1 1996 can be achieved by implementing the enablin
309. s inserted 130004 The data medium is write protected The operation Check whether access has been made to the correct is canceled data carrier Remove the write protection 130005 The file is read only The operation is canceled Check whether access has been made to the correct file Edit the file attributes if necessary 130006 Access to file failed The operation is canceled Check for example if e The correct file is being accessed e The file exists e Another action is preventing simultaneous access to the file 130007 The network connection is interrupted Check the network connection and eliminate the cause Records cannot be saved or read over the network of error connection 130008 The storage card is not available Insert the storage card Records cannot be saved to read from the storage card Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 296 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Appendix A 2 System alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 130009 The specified folder does not exist on the storage Insert the storage card card Any files saved to this directory are not backed up when you switch off the HMI device 130010 The maximum nesting depth can be exhausted Check the configuration when for example a value change in a script results in the call of another script and the second script in turn has a value change that results in the call of yet a further script etc The configured functionality is not s
310. screen The function key of a screen can be assigned one function only either a global or local one The local assignment function takes priority over the global setting The configuration engineer can assign function keys in such a way that you can operate operating elements with function keys for example the alarm view trend view recipe view or status PLC Multi key operation Unwanted actions may be triggered if the operator unintentionally actuates a key combination caution Unintentional actions In Online mode simultaneous operation of more than two keys may cause unintentional actions in the plant Do not press more than two keys simultaneously Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 201 Operating a project 8 6 Bar and gauge 8 6 Bar and gauge Bar Layout Gauge Layout Operation 202 The bar is a dynamic display object The bar displays a value from the PLC as a rectangular area The bar allows you to recognize the following at a glance e The distance of the current value from the configured limit values e Whether a set point value has been reached The bar can display values such as fill levels or batch counts 100 60 30 0 The layout of the bar depends on the configuration e The bar may feature a scale of values e The configured limit values can be indicated by lines e Color changes can signal when a limit valu
311. seneneaneeseeneetedenneeneceeenenened 223 9 3 Displaying AlArM cececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeceeeeaeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseneaeeaaeeeeeenaeees 223 9 4 Display infotexts for an AlALIMN cece cece eeeee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeseeeeeeseneeeeseeeeeeeseeeaeeseeeteeeaeees 226 9 5 Acknowledge Alar eeeeeeeeeeeee ee ttte eee ette ee eres eee e erent een ae ee ee ee ee ee aeee setae eee naeeeeesaeeeseae neen nanen 226 9 6 Ut AN ANN osha se ena cases tude etathewe aea teerennctageet a O 227 10 Operating recipes ceeeeecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee cee eeaeeeeeeaeee ees aaeeeeeaaaeeeseaaeeeeeagaeeeeeesaeeesesaaes caeeesesneeeeeseeneenees 229 10 1 OV SIL OW reani eE E E E E EA 229 10 2 Structure OF a NECID Ss ss eni aa aa aa a a a E e a aaa a EA 230 10 3 Recipes inthe projets a ed ee ead 232 10 4 Displaying a recesia a E 234 10 5 Recipe values in the HMI device and the PLC saasssseessesssesssrnsseenesssnnasnnnnesnnnannennaannnaannnneenannaee 237 10 6 Operating the recipe VIEW aa aa aa NEA Eaa AN 238 106 1 OVENIEW yasio nesa eas anae a Ee A a e AS E E ea aa aE Eaa 238 10 6 2 Creating a recipe data record 0 2 ccccccsccccceecenecneceeneenecesecseeeeseeeesecsaecseesecsecsaseaeeeeeensnaseseenes 239 10 6 3 Editing a recipe data reCOrd iiio aE TEE EE EEOAE 240 10 6 4 Deleting a recipe data r C id snenia dreniene ieie dae Ea ETE EEE E E S 241 10 6 9 Synchronizing tags otisses A SE A a AE areas ESAR S A 242
312. sequence for normal activation Neutral position 1 E gt Enable 2 Neutral position 1 Switch setting 1 2 3 ZT left ZT right ZT left ZT right ZT Enabling button Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO 89 Operator controls and displays 5 2 Operator controls of Mobile Panel 277 8 5 2 6 Introduction Meaning of LEDs 90 The following figure shows the switching sequence for panic activation Neutral position 1 E gt Enable 2 o gt Panic 3 o gt Neutral position 1 Switch setting 1 2 3 ZT left ZT right ZT left ZT right ZT Enabling button If the operator has pressed the enabling button through to the Panic setting the Enable setting will be skipped when the switch is released The signals of the enabling button are fed to the connection box via the connecting cable For special manual operating modes these signals must be interconnected via two channels from the connection box to the safety circuits for power shutdown Note Releasing the enabling button or pressing it through to the Panic setting does not require acknowledgment of the safety shutdown Display the charge status of the bridging battery If the connection cable of the HMI device is disconnected from the connection box the LEDs F2 F4 F6 F8 and F10 indicate the charge status of the bridging battery The LED for function key F1 also lights up for max 9 5 minutes
313. set the connection parameters Close the dialog with OK Select the Options command in the menu Project gt Transfer in WinCC flexible Select the desired option under Installed options Set Transfer mode on the HMI device If automatic transfer mode is enabled on the HMI device the device automatically sets Transfer mode when the removal of an option is initiated Start the removal of the option in WinCC flexible on the configuring PC with the lt lt button Follow the instructions in WinCC flexible A status display appears indicating the progress of the removal The option has now been removed on the HMI device See also Operating modes Data Transmission Options Configuring the data channel Overview Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 183 Commissioning a project 7 8 Installing and removing options 7 8 3 Requirements Installing and removing options using ProSave The HMI device is connected to a PC on which ProSave is installed The data channel is configured on the HMI device Procedure for installing an option Proceed as follows Result N OO FB ON gt From the Windows Start menu start ProSave on the PC Select the HMI device type in the General tab Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the PC Set the connection parameters Select the Options tab Select the desired option u
314. should be deleted 290070 The record specified is not in the import file Check the source of the record number or record name constant or tag value 290071 During the editing of record values a value was entered which exceeded the low limit of the recipe tag The entry is discarded Enter a value within the limits of the recipe tag 290072 When editing record values a value was entered which exceeds the high limit of the recipe tag The entry is discarded Enter a value within the limits of the recipe tag Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0AB0 313 Appendix A 2 System alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 290073 An action e g saving a record failed due to an unknown error The error corresponds to the status alarm IDS_OUT_CMD_EXE_ERR in the large recipe view 290074 While saving it was detected that a record with the Overwrite the record change the record number or specified number already exists but under another cancel the action name 290075 A record with this name already exists Please select a different record name The record is not saved 290110 The default values could not be set due to an error 290111 The Recipes subsystem cannot be used Recipe Transfer the project to the device again together with views have no content and recipe specific functions will not be performed Possibl
315. slider Result The set value is applied Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 204 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Operating a project 8 9 Trends Trend view 8 9 Operating the trend view Operating the trend view Trends continuously display the current process data or process data from a log Trends are displayed in the trend view A trend view can display several trends simultaneously 100 i 0 14 sy ap mj ajalise a 3 Trend Tag assignment Value Date time Pressure Pressure pattern 25 31 01 2006 13 06 34 Ruler Buttons for trend operation Trend value in the value table Trend view example Layout and operation Value table The layout and operation of the trend view depends on the configuration The configuration engineer determines for example the following e Appearance of the trend view the axes value ranges and labels e Operating options of the trend view e Limit values for the trend values e The change of color of the trend in the event of limit violation Please refer to your system documentation to check whether additional information on this subject is available there The trend values can be read from the value table if this is configured e When the ruler is displayed the trend values are shown at a position of the ruler in the value table e When the ruler is hidden the latest trend values are displayed in the value tabl
316. st set Transfer mode on the HMI device or use the automatic transfer function if the project is active Then start the operating system update in ProSave or WinCC flexible Updating the operating system with reset to factory setting First start the operating system update in ProSave or WinCC flexible and switch the power on the HMI device off and on again when prompted Note You have to perform an operating system update with reset to factory settings if the HMI device does not have an operating system yet or if the operating system of the HMI device has become corrupted See chapter Connecting a Configuring PC Page 74 7 7 3 Updating the operating system using WinCC flexible Requirements Procedure The HMI device is connected to a configuring PC No project is open in WinCC flexible Only when updating the operating system without reset to factory settings The data channel is configured on the HMI device Proceed as follows 1 Only when updating the operating system with reset to factory settings Switch off power to the HMI device On the configuring PC select the Communication settings command in the menu Project gt Transfer in WinCC flexible The Communication Settings dialog opens 3 Select the type of HMI device Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the configuring PC then set the connection parameters Close the dialog with OK In WinCC flexible select
317. system if the system alarm persists e The wrong port is used for the connection e System overload 160001 Connection is up because the cause of the interruption has been eliminated 160010 No connection to the server because the server Check access rights identification CLS ID cannot be determined Values cannot be read or written 160011 No connection to the server because the server Check for example if identification CLS ID cannot be determined e The server name is correct Values cannot be read or written e The computer name is correct e The server is registered 160012 No connection to the server because the server Check for example if identification CLS ID cannot be determined e The server name is correct Values cannot be read or written e The computer name is correct e The server is registered Note for advanced users Interpret the value from HRESULT 160013 The specified server was started as InProc server Configure the server as OutProc Server or Local This has not been released and may possibly lead Server to incorrect behavior because the server is running in the same process area as the WinCC flexible Runtime software 160014 Only one OPC server project can be started ona Do not start a second project with OPC server PC MP An alarm is output when an attempt is functionality on the computer made to start a second project The second project has no OPC server functionality and cannot be located as an OPC serv
318. t a new TCP IP network address for the HMI device e Which TCP IP address does the default gateway have e Ifa DNS network is used what are the addresses of the name server e ifa WINS network is used what are the addresses of the name server General procedure for configuring the network The HMI device must be configured prior to network operation The configuration is basically divided into the following steps Proceed as follows 1 Enter the computer name of the HMI device 2 Configure the network address 3 Set the logon information 4 Save the settings Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 150 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Contiguring the operating system 6 8 Configuring network operation 6 8 2 Setting the device name of the HMI device Introduction Requirements Procedure Result See also The HMI device uses the device name to identify itself in the network Eel You have opened the System Properties dialog box by pressing the System amp icon System Properties General Memory Device Name other computers cs These settings are used to identify your Windows CE device to 5 Please type a name without any spaces and a short description Device name ausm a O Device description HMI Device 2 Device name of the HMI device Description for the HMI device optional Note Change the device name for the HMI device in the Device na
319. t has been generated for the respective HMI device can be transferred to it Project file File generated from the runtime project file for use on the HMI device The project file is normally not transferred and remains on the configuring PC The file name extension of a source file is hmi Project file compressed Compressed format of the project file The compressed project file can be transferred together with the runtime project file to the respective HMI device For this purpose backtransfer must be enabled in the project on the configuring PC The compressed project file is normally stored on an external memory card The file extension of a compressed file is pdz Recipe Combination of tags forming a fixed data structure The data structure configured can be assigned data on the HMI device and is then referred to as a record The use of recipes ensures that all the assigned data is transferred synchronously to the PLC during the transfer of a record Runtime project file File generated from the project file for a specific HMI device The runtime project file is transferred to the corresponding HMI device and used to operate and monitor plants The extension of a compressed file is pdz Runtime software The runtime software is a process visualization software used to test a project on a configuring PC Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 328 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Glossary scre
320. t switches from one language to the next in a list e A configured operating element directly sets the desired language Please refer to your system documentation to check whether additional information on this subject is available there See also Changing Regional Settings Page 131 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 193 Operating a project 8 4 Entering values using the touch screen 8 4 Entering values using the touch screen 8 4 1 Overview Screen keyboard When you touch an operating element requiring entry on the HMI device touch screen a screen keyboard appears The screen keyboard is displayed in the following cases e An I O field is selected for input e A password must be entered for accessing a password protected function The screen keyboard is automatically hidden again when input is complete Based on the configuration of the operating element the system displays different screen keyboards for entering numerical or alphanumerical values Note The screen keyboard display is independent of the configured project language General procedure The operating elements of a screen are operated by touching the touch screen Proceed as follows 1 Touch the desired operating element within the screen 2 Depending on the operating element perform further actions Detailed descriptions can be found under the respective operating element Examples I O fie
321. t time ene aca Save all files from temporary memory e g the Program files directory to Lee Files aa 3 flash The files will be restored during system startup The Temp directory will not be saved ee O Automatically repair File system errors on storage Eee at system startup and card insertion time Meaning of the text in the dialog Saves the current registry information to the flash memory The HMI device loads the saved registry information the next time it boots Button for saving registry information Button for saving temporary files 0 Meaning of the text in the dialog Saves all the files in temporary storage to the flash memory for example from the Program Files directory These files are written back when the HMI device is started The Temp directory is not saved Check box for automatically restoring the file system on the memory card when the HMI device starts up and when a memory card is inserted Procedure Proceed as follows 1 Select the Save Registry button to save the current registry settings 2 Select the Save Files button to save temporary files 3 Specify how the file system on the memory card should be restored Activate the check box Automatically Repair to activate automatic restore Deactivate the check box Automatically Repair if you wish to have the files system restored only upon prompting 4 Confirm your en
322. t with electrical circuits Note the ESD instructions Requirements e Torx screwdriver Size 10 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 54 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Installation and connection 4 4 Connecting the connection box Procedure Screws Cover Proceed as follows 1 Loosen the four marked screws 2 Remove the screws and the cover Protective cover MOO000 mMOOO00 MOOO00 MOOO00 MOO000 mOOO0G Protective cover Note Protective cover Do not remove the protective cover Otherwise there is a risk that the electronics of the connection box will be damaged or destroyed Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0AB0O 55 Installation and connection 4 4 Connecting the connection box Notes for closing NOTICE Permissible torque The connection box housing is made of plastic Therefore the mounting hole threads cannot handle the same amount of stress as a comparable metallic housing Do not exceed 0 4 to 0 5 Nm of torque when tightening the screws If the screws are tightened more than 20 times there is risk of damage to the threads Degree of protection not fulfilled When assembling the unit be sure to fit plugs to all unused screw glands and to insert the appropriate seal for the cover Otherwise degree of protection IP65 is not ensured 4 4 3 Setting the box ID at the connect
323. tage is detected immediately but may become apparent only after a longer period of operation Prevent electrostatic charging of your body before you touch the ESD Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 285 Appendix A 1 ESD guideline Anyone who is not connected to the electrical potential of their surroundings is subjected to electrostatic charging The following figure indicates the maximum electrostatic charge anyone is subjected to when coming into contact with the materials shown These values correspond with specifications to IEC 801 2 s O e A a 1 4 4 4 gt 4 4 gt 510 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Relative humidity aN AONO Synthetic materials Wool Antistatic materials such as wood or concrete Protective measures against electrostatic discharge CAUTION Observe grounding measures When working with electrostatic sensitive devices make sure that the person the workplace and the packaging are properly grounded This helps to avoid electrostatic charging As a rule only touch the ESD if this is unavoidable for example for maintenance When you touch modules make sure that you do not touch the pins on the modules or the PCB tracks In this way the discharged energy cannot reach and damage the sensitive devices Discharge electrostatic electricity from your body if you are performing measurements on
324. ted to the bus deactivate the check box Panel is the only master on the bus Enter the bus address for the HMI device in the Address text box NOTICE The bus address in the Address text box must be unique throughout the MPI PROFIBUS DP network 5 Select the transmission rate in the Transmission Rate text box 6 Select the highest station address on the bus in the Highest Station Address or Highest Station text box Select the desired profile from the Profile selection box Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO Contiguring the operating system 6 7 Communication settings 8 The profile information is displayed when you select Bus Parameters button in the PROFIBUS dialog The Profile dialog is read only NOTICE The bus parameters must be the same for all stations in the MPI PROFIBUS DP network Trdy Min Tsar i Tidi Max Tsdr i Tid2 Tset Tqui Gap factor Retry limit 9 Close the Profile dialog 10 Confirm your entries in the MPI or PROFIBUS dialog The dialog closes Result The MPI PROFIBUS DP settings of the HMI device have been changed 6 7 2 Configuring the data channel Introduction If you block all data channels the HMI device is protected against unintentional overwriting of the project data and HMI device image Note A project can only be transferred from the co
325. the current screen is displayed if it has been configured You can scroll through the contents of long infotext with 7 and Al Note Switching between displayed infotext The configuration engineer can configure infotext for an I O field and the associated screen You can switch between two infotexts by touching the infotext window 3 Close the displayed infotext by pressing x Alternative procedure Depending on your configuration infotext can also be called via a configured operating element Please refer to your system documentation to check whether additional information on this subject is available there Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 200 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Operating a project 8 5 Function keys 8 5 Function keys Function keys Function key assignment is defined during configuration The configuration engineer can assign function keys globally and locally Function keys with global function assignment A globally assigned function key always triggers the same action on the HMI device or in the PLC irrespective of the screen displayed Such an action could be for example the activation of a screen or the closure of an alarm window Function keys with local function assignment A function key with local function assignment is screen specific and is therefore only effective within the active screen The function assigned locally to a function key can vary from screen to
326. the operating system 6 3 Changing settings for operation Procedure Proceed as follows 1 Activate the Enable character repeat check box to enable the character repeat 2 Use the buttons to set the delay and rate of the character repeat You can also use the slider control for this 3 Verify your settings Touch the test field The screen keyboard opens Move the screen keyboard as needed Touch any character and keep it pressed Check the implementation of the character repetition and the rate of the character repetition in the test field Correct your setting if necessary 4 Confirm your entries The dialog closes Result The character repeat for the screen keyboard has been altered Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 124 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Contiguring the operating system 6 3 Changing settings for operation 6 3 3 Setting the Double click Introduction You can start applications in the Control Panel and in Windows CE with a double click A double click corresponds to two brief touches in sequence In the Mouse Properties dialog you can set the time interval between the two touches of the touch screen Requirements You have opened the Mouse Properties dialog box by pressing the Mouse icon Mouse Properties Double Click Double click this grid to set the double click sensitivity for both the speed and physical sa
327. the system function again online mode although the entire system is in offline mode This changeover is not allowed The PLC remains in offline mode 110006 The content of the project version area pointer Check e The project ID entered on the PLC e The project ID entered in WinCC flexible 120000 Trend alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 120000 The trend is not displayed because you configured Change the configuration an incorrect axis to the trend or an incorrect trend 120001 The trend is not displayed because you configured Change the configuration an incorrect axis to the trend or an incorrect trend 120002 The trend is not displayed because the tag Check whether the data area for the tag exists in the assigned attempts to access an invalid PLC PLC the configured address is correct and the value address range for the tag is correct 130000 System information alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 130000 The action was not executed Close all other programs Delete files no longer required from the hard disk 130001 The action was not executed Delete files no longer required from the hard disk 130002 The action was not executed Close all other programs Delete files no longer required from the hard disk 130003 No data medium found The operation is canceled Check for example if e The correct data medium is being accessed e The data medium i
328. tion 70016 An attempt was made to select a screen by means of a system function or job This is not possible because the screen number specified does not exist Or A screen could not be generated due to insufficient system memory Or The screen is blocked Or Screen call has not been executed correctly Check the screen number in the function or job with the screen numbers configured Assign the number to a screen if necessary Check the details for the screen call and whether the screen is blocked for specific users 70017 Date time is not read from the area pointer because the address set in the PLC is either not available or has not been set up Change the address or set up the address in the PLC 70018 Acknowledgment that the password list has been successfully imported 70019 Acknowledgment that the password list has been successfully exported 70020 Acknowledgment for activation of alarm reporting 70021 Acknowledgment for deactivation of alarm reporting 70022 Acknowledgment to starting the Import Password List action 70023 Acknowledgment to starting the Export Password List action 70024 The value range of the tag has been exceeded in the system function The calculation of the system function is not performed Check the desired calculation and correct it if necessary 70025 The value range of the tag has been exceeded in the system func
329. tion The calculation of the system function is not performed Check the desired calculation and correct it if necessary 70026 No other screens are stored in the internal screen memory No other screens can be selected 70027 The backup of the RAM file system has been started 70028 The files from the RAM have been copied in the Flash memory The files from the RAM have been copied in the Flash memory Following a restart these saved files are copied back to the RAM file system 290 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Appendix A 2 System alarms Number Effect causes Remedy 70029 Backup of the RAM file system has failed Check the settings in the Control Panel gt OP dialog No backup copy of the RAM file system has been and save the RAM file system using the Save Files made button in the Persistent Storage tab 70030 The parameters configured for the system function Compare the parameters configured for the system are faulty function with the parameters configured for the PLCs The connection to the new PLC was not and correct them as necessary established 70031 The PLC configured in the system function is not Compare the S7 PLC name parameter configured for an S7 PLC the system function with the parameters configured for The connection to the new PLC was not the PLC and correct them as nec
330. tion Deletion has not been completed then restart the last action executed 80022 An attempt was made to use the system function In the project check StartSequenceLog to start a sequence log fora e if the StartSequenceLog system function was log which is not configured as a sequence log No properly configured sequence log file is created e ifthe tag parameters are properly provided with data on the HMI device 80023 An attempt was made to copy a log to itself In the project check The log is not copied e ifthe CopyLog system function was properly configured e ifthe tag parameters are properly provided with data on the HMI device 80024 The CopyLog system function does not allow Edit the CopyLog system function in the project if copying when the target log already contains data necessary Before you initiate the system function Mode parameter The log is not copied delete the destination log file 80025 You have canceled the copy operation Data written up to this point are retained The destination log file if configured is not deleted The cancellation is reported by an error entry RT_ERR at the end of the destination log 80026 This alarm is output after all logs are initialized Values are written to the logs from then on Prior to this no entries are written to the logs irrespective whether WinCC flexible Runtime is active or not 80027 The internal Flash memory has been specified as Configure Stor
331. tion The configuration determines whether an alarm has to be acknowledged or not This is also defined by the alarm class which an alarm belongs to 3 Alarm indicator with three pending alarms The alarm indicator flashes as long as alarms are pending for acknowledgment The number displayed indicates the number of pending alarms The configuration engineer can assign functions to be executed when the alarm indicator is operated Usually the alarm indicator is only used for error alarms Please refer to your system documentation to check whether additional information on this subject is available there Displaying alarms Displaying alarms Alarm view Alarms are displayed in the alarm view or in the alarm window on the HMI device Depending on the configuration the alarm view is displayed as follows e Asa single line Alarm numbers and alarm texts are displayed as single lines e As simple alarm view e As extended alarm view In the simple or extended alarm views the configuration engineer specifies the alarm information to be displayed Depending on the configuration alarms from alarm logs are also displayed in the alarm view Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 223 Operating alarms 9 3 Displaying alarms Simple alarm view 19 04 2005 11 41 37 1 Motor 23 too hot A gt The buttons have the following functions Buttons Functi
332. to the Internal_Box ID tag Once communication between the HMI device and the PLC has been established the current value in the PLC is automatically written to the External_Box ID tag The Auxiliary Tag is required so that the current value of the box ID can be transferred to the PLC A program in the PLC evaluates the live bit After the control program has recognized the creation of communication the control program changes the current value once in the Auxiliary Tag tag This brings about a change of value The value change in the Auxiliary_Tag triggers performance of the SetValue system function The system function allocates the External_Box ID the value of the Interne_Box ID tag 6 To configure this system function open the properties view of the Auxiliary Tag Click Change value in the properties window of the Auxiliary_Tag tag in the Events group The Function list dialog box opens Click the first line of the function list The list opens showing the system functions available in the project 7 Select the SetValue system function from the Calculation group 8 Select the External_Box ID tag at Tag output 9 Select the Internal_Box ID tag at Value DB 1 DBW 0 DB 1 DBW 0 a General BB F ti n list gt Properties b um 1 E Setvalue gt gt i ina dii Tag Out External_Box ID High limit m Low limit Value Internal_Box ID 2 lt No function gt Result
333. tories Transferring License ke Project 165 Recipe data record 244 Transferring back License key 168 Transport conditions Transport damage 51 Trend view Trends Functional scope 29 Limit violation 205 U UL approval 35 Unintentional action 190 Unintentional transfer mode Updating About ProSave Via WinCC flexible Usage Conditions In industry In residential areas Mobile Panel 277 With additional measures 45 USB socket Pin assignment 270 USB PPI cable 153 User view 213 d 214 214 341 Index Admin 218 219 Changing 216 Delete 219 Logoff 216 PLC_User i V Value table Trend view VBScript Functional B 29 Voltage supply W Wall holder 25 Clearance 48 Mounting location Mounting position 51 Overall dimensions 261 Weight 267 268 WinCC flexible Sm rtService 30 WinCC flexible internet settings E mail Windows CE taskbar Password protection WINS Server Wiring Enabling button Wiring examples Connection box Basic 281 Connection box Plus 277 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 342 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO
334. tries The dialog closes Result The HMI device uses the saved registry information the next time it starts The temporary files are copied back Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 133 Configuring the operating system 6 5 Changing HMI device settings 6 5 4 Changing Screen Settings Requirements You opened the Display tab in the OP Properties dialog box by pressing the OP ie icon OP Properties Persistent Storage Display Device Touch eee Button for increasing the brightness Button for reducing the brightness Procedure Proceed as follows 1 Press the UP button to increase the screen brightness You can also reduce the screen brightness by pressing the DOWN button 2 Confirm your entries The dialog closes Result The screen settings have been changed Other possible settings If configured you can also set the brightness as follows e Within an opened project by means of the configured control object e Via the PLC Additional information on this topic may be available in your plant documentation Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 134 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO Contiguring the operating system 6 5 Changing HMI device settings 6 5 5 Setting the screen saver Introduction You can set the following time intervals on the HMI device e For the automatic activation of the screen save
335. trol Panel from the Windows CE start menu e Open the Windows CE start menu Alternatively press the key twice on the alphanumerical screen keyboard The Windows start menu opens e Open the Control Panel with Settings gt Control Panel Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0OABO Configuring the operating system 6 2 2 Reference Overview of functions The following table shows the settings in the Control Panel 6 2 Control Panel Icon Function Backup and Restore with the Memory Card Page 160 Importing and Deleting Certificates Page 159 Setting the date and time Page 129 Configuring the Screen Keyboard Page 122 Changing General Internet Settings Page 155 Setting the Proxy Server Page 156 Changing Privacy Settings Page 157 cane Setting the Character Repetition of the Keyboard Page 123 O Setting the Double click Page 125 w Changing the Network Configuration Page 152 e P address e Name server Changing the Logon Data Page 153 ae ie Backing up Registry Information Page 132 Changing Screen Settings Page 134 Displaying Information about the HMI Device Page 139 Restarting the HMI Device Page 138 Calibrating the Touch Screen Page 126 Display rechargeable battery charge level Page 163 Activate Memory Management Page 1
336. tructions Safety instruction 40 41 84 100 Storage conditions 4 Stripping insulation MPI PROFIBUS DP cable 58 PROFINET cables Subnet mask Supply voltage 267 268 Specifications 265 Support On the Internet 7 Switch off HMI device 78 Switch setting Enabling button 89 Switches Switching on Mobile Panel Symbolic value Changing 199 Entering 199 Synchronizing Date and time Recipe tag 237 242 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0AB0 Index System System alarm Meaning 287 Parameters 287 System functions 91 10 System information LED System properties 120 Device name General Memory T Tag Functional scope Task planner Functional scope 29 TCP IP address Technical data Memory 265 Mobile Panel 277 265 Technical Support 7 Temporary files Backing up Test For ambient conditions 46 Testing Mobile Panel Text box Text list E Functional scope Time Entering 198 Setting Synchronizing Time format Time zone Setting Time dependent reactions 131 Touch screen Calibrating 119 126 Safety instruction 80 Training center 7 Transfer 165 166 Automatic 170 Cancel 77 Manual 169 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0AB0O Transfer mode Unintentional 146 Via MPI Via PROFIBUS DP 143 Transfer settings 120 145 Channel 141 Direc
337. try Backup Progress Saving CE lmage A progress bar shows the status of the backup process 4 If backup was successful the following message is displayed Backup successfully completed Press OK and remove your storage card 5 Press the OK button to confirm the message Remove the memory card Result The HMI device data is now saved on the memory card Requirements The memory card with the backup is inserted in the HMI device Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 161 Configuring the operating system 6 9 Backup and Restore with the Memory Card Procedure for restore Proceed as follows Result 162 1 Press the RESTORE button run the restore operation The HMI device checks the memory card If no memory card is inserted in the card slot of the HMI device or if the memory card is damaged The following warning is displayed Storage card couldn t be detected Try restore again Insert storage card and Press OK or abort restore with CANCEL Replace the faulty memory card and restart the restore operation by pressing the OK button The data to be restored is checked The following messages are displayed in sequence during the check Starting Restore Checking data When the data has been checked the following prompt for confirmation is displayed You are starting RESTORE now All files except files on
338. tting the project language c civecccesedececdevedecstsctedidecbase ebavvecceevsad cevasedeceeasbedesdvadeecustheeeesegeciae 8 4 Entering values using the touch SCreen cccccecccsccee cree ceeteeecraeeaeeecnecesecseeeesnesesecsaeeseeneenes 194 8 4 1 OVERVIGW scceessesoetiieccebasaniceeiesecdei isc ET EEEE 8 4 2 Entering and editing numerical values 200 0 eee eeeeeenne eect eeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeaeeeeetnaeeeeniaeeeaes 8 4 3 Entering and editing alphanumerical values cc eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeseneeeeseneaeeesenaeees 8 4 4 Entering the date and tim 6 iissiccetssncscceseecdexessedeves cunsseceeseiadessipeadeaanbaseusansede cxnsece caieasenseadebadves sais 8 4 5 Entering Symbolic vValue S ic2i22248 oie i a nescence Weta ESEE EEE TER EEE 199 8 4 6 Displaying Moter aia E E E A R O E 8 5 Function KOYS ici iediieviecbernedeasiaiee n E EER 8 6 Bar and Gaug nocere dinn EA AATRE 202 8 7 Operating te SWitCM cccessscdecs iacecebisiecebieiededeebivisdecilidectviatiaceiatieebavin eens eee viateeaelitee seveewasane 203 8 8 Operating the slider Control ceense Eene EE E EEEE 204 8 9 Operating the trend VEW sccicietdel ee Hedi eetillecieoiekh Enea EATE EREE EES 205 8 10 Operating the status TOCE unise a ae a E ea aT Aa 207 ONO OVGNIGW siisii en E EE EA IE EE E EA EN E E 207 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0AB0 Table of contents 8 102 OPSKAllOM casa
339. u Project gt Transfer The Automation License Manager opens When transferring back using the Automation License Manager Start the Automation License Manager via the Windows Start menu Inthe Automation License Manager select the command Connect HMI device in the menu Edit gt Connect target system The Connect Target System dialog opens Under Device Type select the appropriate HMI device type 5 Select the type of connection in the Connection field and set the connection parameters Result Select OK The connection to the HMI device is established The connected HMI device is displayed in the left window of the Automation License Manager In the left window select the HMI device The right window displays the available license keys Drag one or more license keys from the right window and drop them on the HMI device in the left window The license keys are then transferred back to the license diskette The license key has now been transferred back from the HMI device to the license diskette See also Operating modes Page 166 Data Transmission Options Page 167 Configuring the data channel Page 145 Overview Page 185 Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 187 Commissioning a project 7 9 Transferring and transferring license keys Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible 188 Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0A
340. upported 140000 Connection alarms chns7 Connection device Number Effect causes Remedy 140000 An online connection to the PLC is established 140001 The online connection to the PLC was shut down 140003 No tag updating or writing is executed Check the connection and if the PLC is switched on Check the parameter definitions in the Control Panel using Set PG PC interface Restart the system 140004 No tag update or write operations are executed Verify the connection and check whether the PLC is because the access point or the module switched on configuration is faulty Check the access point or the module configuration MPI PPI PROFIBUS in the Control Panel with Set PG PC interface Restart the system 140005 No tag updating or writing is executed because the Use a different HMI device address HMI device address is incorrect possibly too high Verify the connection and check whether the PLC is switched on Check the parameter definitions in the Control Panel using Set PG PC interface Restart the system 140006 No tag updating or writing is executed because the Select a different baud rate in WinCC flexible baud rate is incorrect according to module profile communication peer etc 140007 Tags are not updated or written because the bus Check the user defined bus profile profile is incorrect see 1 The following parameters could not be written to the registry
341. with Start Backup Follow the instructions in ProSave A status view opens to indicate the progress of the operation The system outputs a message when the backup is completed The relevant data is now backed up on the PC Procedure for restore Proceed as follows 1 2 3 From the Windows Start menu start ProSave on the PC Select the HMI device type in the General tab Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the PC Set the connection parameters Select the psb backup file to be restored from the Restore tab You can see the HMI device for which the backup file was created and the type of backup data the file contains Set Transfer mode on the HMI device If automatic transfer mode is enabled on the HMI device the device automatically sets Transfer mode when a restore operation is initiated Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 177 Commissioning a project 7 7 Updating the operating system 6 Start the restore operation in ProSave on the PC with Start Restore Follow the instructions in ProSave A status view opens to indicate the progress of the operation Result When the restore is successfully completed the data backed up on the PC is now on the HMI device See also Operating modes Page 166 Data Transmission Options Page 167 Configuring the data channel Page 145 Overview Page 174 T T Updatin
342. xible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0ABO 155 Configuring the operating system 6 8 Configuring network operation Procedure Result Note Do not change the settings in the User Agent field Proceed as follows Enter the required start page for the browser in the Start Page text box Enter the address of the required search engine in the Search Page field Enter the required cache memory size in the Cache text box The cache can be deleted by means of the Clear Cache button The history can be deleted by means of the Clear History button oOo ak WD Confirm your entries The dialog closes The general parameters for the Internet browser have been set 6 8 6 2 Setting the Proxy Server Requirements 156 You have opened the Connection tab in the Internet Options dialog box by pressing the Internet Options y icon Internet Options General Connection Privacy Advanced _ Use LAN no autodial Autodial name x Address Port 80 C Bypass proxy server for local addresses Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO Contiguring the operating system Procedure 6 8 Configuring network operation Proceed as follows 1 Activate the Use LAN no autodial check box 2 If you use a proxy server activate the Access the Internet using a proxy server check box in th
343. y of the drives that are posing the danger Danger arising from improper use To avoid danger arising from improper use of the enabling buttons the following actions should be taken e Scan the enabling buttons The scan has to be carried out for the following processes When the system being monitored is switched on When the operating mode changes from Automatic to Manual mode In both cases the enabling function may not be used e The enabling button must be released within a specified time frame and returned to the Enable setting Select the time frame according to the activity on the system being monitored Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 OABO 39 Safety instructions and general notes 2 8 STOP Button 2 8 STOP Button Safety instructions The STOP button on the HMI device brings about a safety related stop of the system or machine in accordance with EN 60204 1 1997 Section 9 2 5 3 You have the option of implementing a Category 0 1 or 2 Stop function in accordance with EN 60204 1 1997 Section 9 2 2 The stop function category must be selected on the basis of a risk assessment The Stop function of the HMI device can therefore be used as a reliable machine stop as well as for looping in the Emergency Stop circuit of the system The signals of the STOP button are connected up differently in the connection box Plus and in the connection box Basic e Con
344. you change the new data record number to an existing data record number the existing data record is overwritten Enter values for the elements of the data record The elements of the recipe data record can be assigned default values depending on the configuration Touch E Enter a name for the data record The data record is saved under the new name If the recipe data record already exists a dialog is opened In this dialog specify whether the existing data record is to be overwritten The new recipe data record is saved to the selected recipe Recipes in the project Page 232 10 6 3 Editing a recipe data record Introduction Edit the values of the recipe data records and save them in a recipe view Synchronization with the PLC Requirements 240 If you want to display the current recipe values from the PLC in the recipe view you first have to read the current values from the PLC with in The values changed in the recipe view only become effective when the amended data record is transferred to the PLC by means of the ain button A screen with a recipe view is displayed Mobile Panel 277 WinCC flexible Operating Instructions 08 2008 6AV6691 1DL01 0AB0 Operating recipes 10 6 Operating the recipe view Proceed as follows If the recipe view contains several recipes Select the recipe which contains the desired recipe data record Select the recipe data record you want to change

SIMATIC HMI HMI device Mobile Panel 277

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents